• Skip to primary navigation
  • Skip to main content
  • Skip to primary sidebar

Fantabulosity logo

  • All Recipes
  • Vintage Recipes
  • Holiday
  • Dinner Theme System
  • About
  • Navigation Menu: Social Icons

    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
menu icon
go to homepage
  • Recipes
  • Desserts
  • Dinners
  • Gatherings
  • Holidays
  • About Jessica
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
  • search icon
    Homepage link
    • Recipes
    • Desserts
    • Dinners
    • Gatherings
    • Holidays
    • About Jessica
    • Facebook
    • Instagram
    • Pinterest
    • TikTok
    • YouTube
  • ×
    Home » Recipes

    Chocolate Chip Cake

    Chocolate Chip Cake

    June 30, 2026

    Slice of chocolate chip cake made in a 9x13 pan, with brown sugar buttercream frosting.

    If you love a classic chocolate chip cookie, wait until you try it in cake form. This Chocolate Chip Cake is soft, buttery, and loaded with chocolate chips in every bite. It’s topped with a fluffy brown sugar buttercream and finished with a rich chocolate fudge drizzle that makes it feel just a little extra without being difficult to make.

    An Easy Chocolate Chip Cake Everyone Asks For

    At first glance it looks like a simple vanilla cake with chocolate chips, but one bite tells a different story. The browned butter gives it a rich flavor, the chocolate chips stay in every bite, and the brown sugar frosting makes it a flavor combination that is irrisistible. It’s one of the cake recipes that will get put on the crowd-pleasing rotation for sure.

    A slice of chocolate chip cake on a plate.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    What makes this chocolate chip cake so moist?

    The combination of browned butter, whole milk yogurt, and whole milk creates a soft, tender crumb that stays moist for several days.

    Can I use Greek yogurt instead of regular yogurt?

    Yes! Plain Greek yogurt works beautifully in this recipe. It gives the cake the same rich texture while adding a little extra protein.

    Why do you toss the chocolate chips with flour?

    Coating the chocolate chips with a little flour helps keep them suspended throughout the batter instead of sinking to the bottom while the cake bakes.

    How do I know when the cake is done?

    Insert a clean knife or toothpick into the center. If it comes out clean or with just a few moist crumbs, it’s ready. If you’re using an instant-read thermometer, the center of the cake should register around 160°F.

    Can I make this cake ahead of time?

    Absolutely. In fact, the flavor is even better the next day. Just cover it tightly and store it at room temperature until you’re ready to serve.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below for the full list of ingredients and measurements.

    Ingredients for chocolate chip cake recipe on counter.

    Chocolate Chip Cake

    • 1 cup unsalted butter, browned and slightly cooled - Browning the butter gives this cake a richer, almost nutty flavor.
    • 1½ cups granulated sugar - Sweetens the cake and helps create a tender crumb.
    • ½ cup packed light brown sugar - Adds moisture and a little caramel flavor.
    • 3 large eggs, room temperature - Help give the cake structure.
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract - Adds classic homemade flavor.
    • 1 cup whole milk yogurt or plain Greek yogurt, room temperature - Keeps the cake soft and moist.
    • 2¾ cups all-purpose flour - Gives the cake its structure.
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder - Helps the cake rise.
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda - Works with the yogurt to help the cake bake up tender.
    • 1 teaspoon fine salt - Balances the sweetness.
    • 1 cup whole milk, room temperature - Helps keep the batter smooth and the cake soft.
    • 1½ cups semisweet chocolate chips, tossed with 1 tablespoon flour - Tossing them in flour helps keep them from sinking to the bottom.

    Brown Sugar Buttercream

    • 1½ cups unsalted butter, softened - Makes the frosting creamy and fluffy.
    • ½ cup light brown sugar, finely packed - Gives the frosting a rich brown sugar flavor.
    • 4 cups powdered sugar - Sweetens and thickens the frosting.
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract - Adds warmth and flavor.
    • 2 to 4 tablespoons heavy cream - Thins the frosting to a smooth, spreadable consistency.
    • Pinch of salt - Balances the sweetness.

    Chocolate Fudge Swirl

    • ½ cup semisweet chocolate chips - Creates the chocolate fudge drizzle.
    • 2 tablespoons butter - Makes the fudge smooth and glossy.
    • 2 tablespoons corn syrup or honey - Helps make the fudge shiny and pourable.
    • ¼ cup heavy cream - Turns the melted chocolate into a soft fudge swirl.

    Instructions

    Brown the Butter

    In a small saucepan over medium heat, cook 1 cup unsalted butter until the milk solids turn golden brown and the butter smells nutty. Remove from the heat and let it cool for about 10 minutes. It should still be pourable but not hot.

    Prepare the Cake Batter

    Preheat the oven to 350°F and grease a 9×13-inch baking dish.

    Beat together the browned butter with 1½ cups granulated sugar and ½ cup light brown sugar until creamy, about 2 to 3 minutes.

    Browned butter mixed with different sugars in mixing bowl for chocolate chip sheet cake.

    Add 3 large eggs, one at a time, mixing well after each addition.

    Mix in 2 teaspoons vanilla extract and 1 cup whole milk yogurt until smooth.

    In a separate bowl, whisk together 2¾ cups all-purpose flour, 2 teaspoons baking powder, ½ teaspoon baking soda, and 1 teaspoon salt.

    Dry ingredients like flour and salt in mixing bowl for cake recipe.

    Alternate adding the dry ingredients with 1 cup whole milk, mixing on low speed just until almost combined.

    Wet and dry mixture mixed together for cake batter.

    Toss 1½ cups semisweet chocolate chips with 1 tablespoon flour, then gently fold them into the batter until no dry streaks remain. Be careful not to overmix.

    Chocolate chips mixed in to cake batter.

    Bake

    Spread the batter evenly into the prepared baking dish.

    Chocolate chip cake batter poured in to 9x13 baking dish.

    Bake for 28 to 34 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean or the center reaches about 160°F on an instant-read thermometer.

    Allow the cake to cool completely before frosting.

    Baked chocolate chip cake in 9x13 baking pan.

    Make the Brown Sugar Buttercream

    Beat 1½ cups softened unsalted butter with ½ cup light brown sugar for 3 to 4 minutes until light and fluffy.

    Butter and brown sugar mixed together in mixing bowl for cake frosting.

    Gradually beat in 4 cups powdered sugar.

    Mix in 1 tablespoon vanilla extract, a pinch of salt, and 2 to 4 tablespoons heavy cream, adding the cream one tablespoon at a time until the frosting is smooth and spreadable.

    Make the Chocolate Fudge Swirl

    Melt ½ cup semisweet chocolate chips, 2 tablespoons butter, and 2 tablespoons corn syrup (or honey) together over low heat.

    Stir in ¼ cup heavy cream until smooth and glossy.

    Allow the fudge to cool until it’s warm but no longer hot.

    Chocolate swirl for frosting of chocolate chip cake.

    Frost the Cake

    Spread the brown sugar buttercream over the cooled cake.

    Brown sugar icing for chocolate chip cake.

    Spoon the warm fudge over the frosting and gently swirl it with an offset spatula or butter knife.

    If desired, sprinkle a handful of mini chocolate chips over the top before serving.

    Chocolate swirl on top of chocolate chip cake with brown sugar buttercream frosting.

    Tips for the Best Chocolate Chip Cake

    • Toss the chocolate chips with flour before adding them to the batter to help prevent sinking.
    • Don’t overmix the batter after adding the flour. Mixing just until combined creates a softer cake.
    • Let the fudge cool slightly before swirling it into the frosting so it doesn’t melt the buttercream.
    • Love extra frosting? Double the buttercream recipe.
    • Bring refrigerated cake to room temperature before serving for the softest texture.
    A slice of chocolate chip cake on a spatula.

    Storage

    Cover the cake tightly and store it at room temperature for up to 3 days.

    For longer storage, refrigerate it for up to 1 week. Let slices sit at room temperature for about 30 minutes before serving.

    The unfrosted cake also freezes well for up to 3 months.

    A bite of chocolate chip cake on a fork.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    • Texas Sheet Cake
    • Granny Cake
    • Hummingbird Cake

    Recipe

    Slice of chocolate chip cake made in a 9x13 pan, with brown sugar buttercream frosting.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Chocolate Chip Cake

    This Chocolate Chip Cake is soft, buttery, and loaded with chocolate chips, then topped with a fluffy brown sugar buttercream and rich chocolate fudge swirl.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 35 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    1 hour hour
    Total Time 2 hours hours 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 15 servings
    Calories 829kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Cake Recipe

    • 1 cup unsalted butter browned and cooled slightly
    • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar
    • ½ cup light brown sugar packed
    • 3 large eggs room temp
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 cup unflavored whole milk yogurt or Greek yogurt, room temp
    • 2 ¾ cups all-purpose flour
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon fine salt
    • 1 cup whole milk room temp
    • 1 ½ cups semisweet chocolate chips tossed in 1 tablespoon flour

    Vanilla Brown Sugar Buttercream

    • 1 ½ cups unsalted butter softened
    • ½ cup light brown sugar very finely packed
    • 4 cups powdered sugar
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
    • 2-4 tablespoons heavy cream
    • 1 Pinch of salt

    Warm Fudge Swirl

    • ½ cup semisweet chocolate chips
    • 2 tablespoons butter
    • 2 tablespoons corn syrup or honey
    • ¼ cup heavy cream

    Instructions

    Make the Browned Butter Base

    • In a small saucepan, cook the butter over medium heat until the milk solids turn golden and it smells nutty. Don't over cook. Cooking until golden will add some flavor but if you over cook it, the butter will become bitter.
    • Remove from heat and cool for 10 minutes - it should be pourable but not hot.

    Mix the Cake Batter

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Grease pans. You can use butter but I used a butter flavored spray and it worked well.
    • Using a mixer with the flat beater attachment, combine browned butter, granulated sugar, and brown sugar. Beat on medium speed until creamy, 2-3 minutes.
    • Add eggs one at a time. Using slow speed, mix well.
    • Add vanilla and yogurt. Using slow speed, mix until combined.
    • In a separate bowl, add flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Whisk or sift to combine.
    • Alternate adding dry ingredients and milk into the batter, mixing on low until just combined. I mix until about ¾ combined.
    • Fold in chocolate chips. Mix until barely combined, don't over mix.

    Bake

    • Spread batter into pan(s).
    • Bake 28-34 minutes for a 9×13 or 22-26 minutes for round pans, until lightly golden and a toothpick comes out clean.
    • Cool fully before frosting.

    Make the Brown Sugar Buttercream

    • Using a mixer with the flat beater attachment, beat butter and brown sugar together for 3-4 minutes until whipped and smooth.
    • At slow speed, add powdered sugar gradually. I add about 1 cup at a time.
    • Mix in vanilla and salt.
    • Add heavy cream 1 tablespoon at a time until fluffy and spreadable.

    Make the Warm Fudge Swirl

    • Melt chocolate chips, butter, and corn syrup together over low heat. You can also do it in the microwave but only at 10 second intervals until it starts to melt. If you do it longer the chocolate will burn.
    • Stir in heavy cream to make a glossy fudge.
    • Let cool slightly. It should be pourable but not hot. If it is hot or even too warm it will melt the frosting.

    Frost & Swirl

    • Spread a thick layer of buttercream over the cooled cake.
    • Drizzle spoonfuls of warm fudge around the surface.
    • Use a spatula to gently swirl, creating ribbons (do not fully mix).
    • Sprinkle extra mini chocolate chips on top. (optional)

    Notes

    • Toss the chocolate chips with flour before mixing into the batter.
    • Brown the butter until golden and fragrant, not dark brown.
    • Do not overmix the batter after adding the flour.
    • Let the fudge cool slightly before swirling into the frosting.
    • Internal temperature should reach about 160°F for doneness.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 829kcal | Carbohydrates: 101g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 46g | Saturated Fat: 28g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 130mg | Sodium: 304mg | Potassium: 260mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 79g | Vitamin A: 1182IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 121mg | Iron: 3mg

    Better Than Anything Cake

    June 26, 2026

    Slice of better than anything cake, showing the toffee and caramel on top of chocolate cake.

    This Better Than Anything Cake is a rich chocolate poke cake filled with sweetened condensed milk and caramel sauce, then topped with whipped topping and crunchy toffee bits. It’s easy to make, perfect as a potluck dessert, and one of those nostalgic cakes that people always seem to go back for a second slice.

    Why This Old-Fashioned Cake Has Stayed Popular for Decades

    Some desserts come and go, but this Cake has been showing up at potlucks, family reunions, church dinners, and holiday gatherings for years. Between the moist chocolate cake, creamy caramel filling, fluffy topping, and crunchy toffee bits, it’s easy to see why people keep making it.

    Slice of better than anything cake with bite taken out, sitting on plate.

    If you love peanut butter, you’ll also love this chocolate peanut butter toffee cake recipe that has similar flavors.

    What makes this recipe so popular is how simple it is. It starts with a boxed chocolate cake mix, but after the cake is baked, it’s poked all over and filled with a mixture of sweetened condensed milk and caramel sauce. As it chills, all of that goodness soaks into the cake, creating a moist dessert with flavor in every bite.

    The whipped topping and toffee bits finish it off perfectly, adding just the right balance of creamy and crunchy textures. It’s the kind of dessert that looks impressive on a dessert table but requires very little effort.

    9x13 Better Than Anything Cake, with slice removed.

    FAQs

    Does Better Than Anything Cake need to be refrigerated?

    Yes, this cake needs to be stored in the refrigerator because it contains sweetened condensed milk and whipped topping. Keep it covered until you’re ready to serve.

    Can I make Better Than Anything Cake ahead of time?

    Absolutely. In fact, it tastes even better after chilling for several hours because the caramel mixture has more time to soak into the cake.

    Can I use a different flavor cake mix?

    Yes. Chocolate cake is traditional, but devil’s food cake, yellow cake, or butter cake can also be used.

    Why is it called Better Than Anything Cake?

    Better Than Anything Cake is a family-friendly name for a classic chocolate caramel poke cake that’s been around for years. It’s rich, sweet, creamy, and loaded with caramel and toffee flavor.

    Can I freeze this cake?

    I don’t recommend freezing the cake after the whipped topping has been added because the texture can change once thawed.

    How long does this cake last in the refrigerator?

    Store the cake covered in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients on counter to make Better Than Anything.

    Cake Ingredients

    • 1 box chocolate cake mix - Creates the base of the cake and keeps this recipe quick and easy to prepare.
    • Eggs, oil, and milk called for on the package directions - Used to prepare the cake mix. Milk can be substituted for water for a richer flavor.

    Filling Ingredients

    • 1 (14-ounce) can sweetened condensed milk - Adds sweetness and creates the incredibly moist texture this cake is known for.
    • 1 (12.25-ounce) jar caramel topping - Mixed with the sweetened condensed milk and poured into the holes of the cake. Reserve a small amount for drizzling over the finished cake.

    Topping Ingredients

    • 1 (12-ounce) container whipped topping - Creates a light, fluffy layer that balances the rich chocolate and caramel flavors.
    • ¾ cup crushed toffee candy bars - Heath bars are the traditional choice and add buttery crunch to every bite.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven according to the cake mix package directions and grease a 9×13-inch baking dish.

    Prepare 1 box chocolate cake mix using the eggs, oil, and milk called for on the package. Pour the batter into the prepared baking dish and bake according to the package directions.

    Chocolate cake mix batter in mixing bowl.

    Allow the cake to cool for 10 to 15 minutes.

    Baked chocolate cake in 9x13 baking pan.

    Using the handle of a wooden spoon or a large skewer, poke holes all over the cake. Make at least 50 holes, making sure they’re deep enough for the filling to soak into the cake.

    Chocolate cake in 9x13 baking dish that was poked with wooden spoon.

    In a medium bowl, whisk together 1 (14-ounce) can sweetened condensed milk and about 10 ounces of the 12.25-ounce jar caramel topping until smooth. Reserve the remaining caramel topping for later.

    Caramel sweetened condensed milk mixture in mixing bowl.

    Slowly pour the caramel mixture over the cake, focusing on the holes so the filling can soak throughout the cake.

    Caramel and condensed milk mixture poured over chocolate poke cake.

    Cover and refrigerate for at least 2 hours or overnight.

    Spread 1 (12-ounce) container whipped topping evenly over the chilled cake.

    Cool Whip spread over the top of Better Than Anything Cake.

    Drizzle the reserved caramel topping over the top.

    Sprinkle ¾ cup crushed toffee candy bars evenly across the cake.

    Toffee and caramel on top of Better Than Anything Cake.

    Slice and serve chilled.

    Tips

    • Use the handle of a wooden spoon instead of a skewer if you want larger pockets of caramel throughout the cake.
    • Pour the caramel mixture over the cake while it’s still slightly warm so it absorbs more easily.
    • For the best flavor and texture, refrigerate the cake overnight before serving.
    • Don’t skip the chilling time. It allows the caramel mixture to fully soak into the cake.
    • Devil’s food cake mix can be substituted for an even richer chocolate flavor.
    A slice of better than anything cake on a plate, with a fork.

    More Recipes

    If you love old-fashioned cake recipes like this one, then you’ll also love these:

    • Depression Cake
    • Black Forest Poke Cake
    • Ugly Duckling Cake
    • Granny Cake

    Recipe

    Slice of better than anything cake, showing the toffee and caramel on top of chocolate cake.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Better Than Anything Cake

    This Better Than Anything Cake is a classic chocolate poke cake filled with caramel and sweetened condensed milk, then topped with whipped topping and crunchy toffee bits for an easy dessert that's perfect for potlucks, holidays, and family gatherings.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Chilling Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 40 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 666kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 box chocolate cake mix
    • eggs, milk, and oil per cake mix box directions
    • 14 ounce can sweetened condensed milk
    • 12.25 ounce jar caramel topping reserve about 2 ounces for topping, room temperature or warmed
    • 12 ounce container whipped topping i.e. Cool Whip
    • ¾ cup toffee candy bars crushed (i.e. Heath)

    Instructions

    • Bake cake in a 9×13 pan per packaging directions.
    • Cool cake for 10-15 minutes.
    • Using a large wooden skewer or the end of a wooden spoon, poke holes into prepared cake deep but not all the way to the bottom. Make at least 50 holes.
    • Add sweetened condensed milk and caramel topping together and whisk until combined.
    • Gently and slowly pour caramel mixture over cake focusing on the poked holes.
    • Cover and refrigerate for 2 hours to overnight.
    • Spread whipped topping evenly on top of cake.
    • Drizzle with remaining caramel topping/sauce.
    • Sprinkle toffee crumbles over top.
    • Cut and serve.

    Notes

    • Poke plenty of holes in the cake so the caramel mixture can soak into every bite. 
    • Use the handle of a wooden spoon instead of a skewer to make larger holes that hold more of the caramel filling.
    • Pour the caramel and sweetened condensed milk mixture over the cake while it’s still slightly warm for the best absorption.
    • Refrigerate for at least 2 hours before serving, but overnight is even better.
    • Reserve a little caramel sauce for drizzling over the whipped topping just before serving.
    • Heath bars are the traditional topping, but any chocolate-covered toffee candy works well.
    • Store leftovers covered in the refrigerator for up to 4 days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 666kcal | Carbohydrates: 116g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 3g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Cholesterol: 29mg | Sodium: 765mg | Potassium: 437mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 93g | Vitamin A: 248IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 290mg | Iron: 3mg

    Angel Food Cake Recipe

    June 22, 2026

    Angel food cake on cake stand, that's topped with fruit.

    This Angel Food Cake is light, fluffy, and made completely from scratch with simple ingredients. Made with whipped egg whites and cake flour, it bakes up tall with a delicate texture that’s perfect for serving with fresh berries, whipped cream, or a dusting of powdered sugar.

    If you love light and fluffy desserts, be sure to try my Cloud Cake recipe too. It’s another reader favorite that’s perfect for special occasions.

    A Classic Homemade Cake That’s Light as a Cloud

    Angel food cake has been showing up at family gatherings, church potlucks, and holiday tables for generations. It’s one of those desserts that feels special without being fussy, and the simple ingredients create a cake that’s surprisingly impressive.

    Angel food cake on cake stand, topped with fruit.

    Unlike richer cakes made with butter and oil, angel food cake gets its signature height and airy texture from whipped egg whites. The result is a soft, tender cake that’s delicious on its own but also pairs beautifully with fresh fruit and whipped cream.

    Whether you’re making it for Easter, Mother’s Day, a summer barbecue, or simply because you have extra egg whites to use up, this homemade angel food cake is a classic recipe worth keeping.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Why is it called angel food cake?

    Angel food cake gets its name from its light, airy texture. The fluffy white cake was said to be so light that it was “fit for angels.”

    Why can’t I grease the pan?

    Angel food cake batter needs to cling to the sides of the pan as it rises. Greasing the pan prevents the batter from climbing properly and can cause the cake to collapse.

    Can I use all-purpose flour instead of cake flour?

    Cake flour is highly recommended because it creates the delicate texture angel food cake is known for. All-purpose flour will produce a heavier cake.

    Why do I have to cool the cake upside down?

    Cooling the cake upside down helps prevent it from collapsing while the structure sets. This step is one of the keys to achieving that tall, fluffy texture.

    Can angel food cake be made ahead of time?

    Yes. Angel food cake can be baked a day or two ahead and stored covered at room temperature until ready to serve.

    Ingredients

    For the angel food cake, you’ll need:

    • 1 cup cake flour
    • 1½ cups granulated sugar, divided
    • 12 egg whites
    • 1½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1½ teaspoons cream of tartar
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    Optional toppings:

    • Powdered sugar
    • Whipped cream
    • Fresh strawberries
    • Fresh blueberries
    Ingredients to make angel food cake.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 375°F. Set aside an ungreased 10-inch tube pan.
    • Place the 1½ cups granulated sugar in a blender or food processor and blend for 2 to 3 minutes until fine and powdery.
    Sugar that has been put through food processor in mixing bowl.
    • Remove 1 cup of the sugar and set it aside.
    • Add the 1 cup cake flour to the remaining sugar in the blender and pulse several times until combined and aerated.
    Flour added to processed sugar in mixing bowl.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the 12 egg whites, 1½ teaspoons vanilla extract, ½ teaspoon salt, and 1½ teaspoons cream of tartar.
    Eggs in mixing bowl with vanilla.
    • Using a hand mixer or stand mixer fitted with the whisk attachment, beat until foamy. Gradually add the reserved 1 cup sugar and continue whipping until medium-stiff peaks form.
    Stiff peaks formed in mixing bowl.
    • Gently fold the flour mixture into the egg whites about ⅓ cup at a time, being careful not to deflate the batter.
    • Pour the batter into the ungreased tube pan and spread evenly.
    Angel food cake batter poured in to tube pan.
    • Bake for 40 to 45 minutes, or until the cake springs back when lightly touched.
    Baked angel food cake in pan.
    • Immediately invert the pan and allow the cake to cool upside down for about 3 hours.
    • Once cooled, run a thin knife around the edges and center tube to release the cake.
    Baked angel food cake cooling on wire rack.
    • Dust with powdered sugar and serve with whipped cream and fresh berries if desired.
    Powdered sugar sprinkled on top of angel food cake, as well as fruit.

    Tips for the Best Angel Food Cake

    • Use freshly separated egg whites for the best volume.
    • Make sure no egg yolk gets into the whites.
    • Do not skip the cream of tartar, as it helps stabilize the egg whites.
    • Fold gently to keep as much air in the batter as possible.
    • Never grease the tube pan.
    • Allow the cake to cool completely upside down before removing it from the pan.
    • Cake flour creates the softest, most tender texture.
    A slice of angel food cake on a plate, topped with strawberries.

    Storage

    Store angel food cake tightly covered at room temperature for up to 2 days or in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Freezing

    Wrap the cooled cake tightly in plastic wrap and place it in a freezer-safe container or bag. Freeze for up to 3 months.

    Thaw overnight in the refrigerator and bring to room temperature before serving.

    More Cake Recipes You’ll Love

    • Strawberry Pound Cake
    • Supper Cake Recipe
    • 7Up Cake

    Recipe

    Angel food cake on cake stand, that's topped with fruit.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Angel Food Cake Recipe

    This homemade Angel Food Cake is light, fluffy, and perfectly sweet. Serve it with fresh berries, whipped cream, or a simple dusting of powdered sugar for a classic dessert everyone loves.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 40 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 14 servings
    Calories 130kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup cake flour
    • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar divided
    • 12 egg whites
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 ½ teaspoons cream of tartar
    • ½ teaspoon salt

    Optional Toppings:

    • Powdered sugar
    • Whipped cream
    • Fruit of choice such as blueberries and strawberries

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 375 degrees fahrenheit and set your tube pan to the side.
    • In a blender or food processor, blend granulated sugar until fine and powdery. About 2-3 minutes. Remove 1 cup of sugar and set aside. To the blender add cake flour and pulse 5-6 times or until the flour and sugar are blended and aerated.
    • In a large bowl using a hand mixer or a stand mixer on low-medium speed, use a whisk attachment to whip the egg whites, vanilla extract, salt and cream of tartar until foamy, about 1-2 minutes. Gradually add the one cup of set aside sugar until the egg white mixture reaches medium stiff peaks.
    • Once the egg white mixture has reached medium stiff peaks, fold in the blended flour and sugar mixture ⅓ cup at a time. Be careful not to over mix. Pour and evenly spread the batter into an ungreased 10-inch tube pan. Gently move the pan from side to side to even out the cake batter.
    • Bake for 40-45 minutes or until the cake springs back when touched. Remove from the oven and cool upside-down on a cooling rack for about 3 hours. Once cooled, run a thin knife along the edges of the pan and gently tap the pan on the counter until the cake releases.
    • Garnish the top of the cake with powdered sugar. Serve with whipped cream and fresh berries if desired.

    Notes

    • Do not grease the tube pan.
    • Use cake flour for the best texture.
    • Fold gently to keep the batter airy.
    • Cool completely upside down before removing from the pan.
    • Freeze for up to 3 months.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 130kcal | Carbohydrates: 28g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 0.3g | Saturated Fat: 0.02g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 0.01g | Sodium: 126mg | Potassium: 105mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 0.2IU | Calcium: 3mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Strawberry Lemonade Bread

    June 21, 2026

    Sliced strawberry lemonade bread, with a glaze dripping over the top.

    This Strawberry Lemonade Bread is soft, moist, and packed with fresh strawberry and lemon flavor. Made with juicy strawberries, lemon zest, Greek yogurt, and a simple lemon glaze, it’s the kind of dessert recipe that feels right at home at a summer brunch, afternoon coffee break, or dessert table.

    An Easy Strawberry Bread That Tastes Like Summer

    If you’re looking for a simple loaf cake that’s bright, fresh, and easy to make, this Strawberry Lemonade Bread deserves a spot on your baking list.

    The combination of sweet strawberries and tangy lemon gives it that classic strawberry lemonade flavor everyone recognizes and loves, in this pink lemonade cake, too!

    Sliced strawberry lemonade bread, with a glaze dripped over the top.

    It’s pretty enough for a baby shower or brunch table but easy enough to bake on a random Tuesday when you have strawberries that need to be used up.

    One of my favorite things about this recipe is that it tastes homemade in the best possible way. No complicated techniques, no fancy ingredients, just a simple loaf packed with fresh flavor.

    I already have a classic Strawberry Bread recipe on the site, but this version has a completely different flavor profile. The addition of fresh lemon zest, lemon juice, and a sweet lemon glaze gives it that bright strawberry lemonade flavor that’s perfect for spring and summer.

    Baked strawberry lemonade bread, drizzled with lemon glaze.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Why do you toss the strawberries with flour?

    Coating the chopped strawberries with flour helps keep them suspended throughout the batter instead of sinking to the bottom while baking. It also absorbs a little of the extra moisture from the berries.

    Can I use frozen strawberries?

    Yes. Use them straight from the freezer without thawing first. Dice them into small pieces and toss them with flour before adding them to the batter.

    Can I substitute the Greek yogurt?

    Yes. Sour cream works as a one-to-one substitute and gives very similar results.

    Can I skip the glaze?

    You can, but the glaze is what gives the loaf its lemonade-inspired finish. The extra lemon flavor really complements the strawberries.

    How do I know when the bread is done baking?

    Insert a toothpick into the center of the loaf. If it comes out clean or with just a few moist crumbs, it’s ready. If the center is still wet, bake for another 5 to 10 minutes and check again.

    Ingredients

    For the bread:

    • 1¾ cups all-purpose flour, divided
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • Zest of 1 lemon
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar
    • ½ cup neutral oil, such as vegetable or avocado oil
    • 2 large eggs
    • 2 tablespoons fresh lemon juice
    • ½ cup Greek yogurt
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ cup milk
    • 1¼ cups chopped strawberries
    • ¼ cup sliced strawberries for topping

    For the glaze:

    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • Remaining fresh lemon juice from the lemon (about 1 to 2 tablespoons)
    Ingredients on table to make strawberry lemonade bread.

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 350°F. Line a loaf pan with parchment paper and lightly coat it with baking spray. Set aside.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together 1½ cups of the flour, the baking powder, baking soda, and salt.
    Flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt in mixing bowl.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the granulated sugar and lemon zest. Rub them together with your fingers until the mixture feels sandy and fragrant. This helps release the lemon oils and adds more flavor to the bread.
    Lemon zest mixed in to the dry ingredients in mixing bowl.
    • Add the oil and stir until combined.
    • Add the eggs one at a time, mixing after each addition.
    • Stir in 2 tablespoons lemon juice and the vanilla extract.
    • Add the Greek yogurt and mix until smooth. Stir in the milk.
    Yogurt, oil, eggs, and lemon juice mixed in a bowl.
    • In a small bowl, toss the chopped strawberries with the remaining ¼ cup flour.
    • Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients and stir just until combined.
    • Fold in the flour-coated strawberries.
    Flour coated strawberries, poured in to wet ingredients.
    • Transfer the batter to the prepared loaf pan and spread evenly. Top with the sliced strawberries.
    Strawberries placed on top of bread in loaf pan.
    • Bake for 50 to 55 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    • Allow the bread to cool in the pan for 10 to 15 minutes before transferring to a wire rack.
    Baked strawberry lemonade bread.
    • To make the glaze, whisk together the powdered sugar and remaining lemon juice until smooth.
    • Drizzle the glaze over the cooled bread before slicing and serving.
    Lemon glaze poured on top of strawberry bread.

    Tips for the Best Strawberry Lemonade Bread

    • Rub the lemon zest into the sugar before mixing. This simple step creates a stronger lemon flavor throughout the loaf.
    • Don’t overmix the batter. Stir only until the flour disappears to keep the bread soft and tender.
    • Use ripe but firm strawberries for the best texture.
    • If the top begins browning too quickly, loosely tent the loaf with foil during the final portion of baking.

    Storage

    Store covered at room temperature for up to 3 days.

    For longer storage, refrigerate in an airtight container for up to 5 days and bring to room temperature before serving.

    To freeze, wrap the loaf tightly and store in a freezer-safe container for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before serving.

    Sliced piece of strawberry lemonade bread on a plate, next to a fork.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    • Strawberry Texas Sheet Cake
    • Strawberry Shortcake Sheet Cake
    • Sweet Strawberry Rolls
    • Strawberry Earthquake Cake

    Recipe

    Sliced strawberry lemonade bread, with a glaze dripping over the top.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Lemonade Bread

    This Strawberry Lemonade Bread is a moist loaf cake made with fresh strawberries, lemon zest, and a sweet lemon glaze for an easy spring and summer dessert.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 slices
    Calories 396kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 ¾ cup all purpose flour divided (¼ cup used for the strawberries)
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 lemon zested and juiced 3-4 tablespoons of juice separated
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar
    • ½ cup oil vegetable, avocado, or any neutral oil
    • 2 eggs
    • ½ cup Greek yogurt
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ cup milk
    • 1 ½ cups strawberries (1 ¼ cup chopped, ¼ cup sliced and separated)
    • 1 cup powdered sugar

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F. Line a bread pan with a piece of parchment paper and a small amount of baking spray. Set aside.
    • In a medium-sized mixing bowl combine 1 ½ cups of the all purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Stir to combine and set aside.
    • Then, in a large mixing bowl add the sugar and lemon zest. With your fingers, rub the sugar and lemon zest together to create a sandy texture.
    • Next add the oil. Stir to combine.
    • Add the eggs one at a time, stirring to combine.
    • Add 2 tablespoons of lemon juice and vanilla and stir to combine.
    • Then, add the Greek yogurt stirring to combine then the milk.
    • Next, in a small bowl combine 1 ¼ cups of the chopped strawberries and the reserved ¼ cup of flour. Toss to coat. Set aside.
    • Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients. Stirring to just combine.
    • Add the floured strawberries to the batter, and fold those in.
    • Transfer the dough to the prepared bread pan. Top with the remaining strawberries.
    • Bake at 350 degrees F for 50-55 minutes, or until a toothpick comes out clean.
    • Cool for 10-15 minutes.
    • Next, in a bowl combine the powdered sugar and the remaining lemon juice.
    • Drizzle over the top of the bread, serve and enjoy.

    Notes

    • Rub the lemon zest into the sugar before mixing. This helps release the lemon oils and creates a stronger lemon flavor throughout the bread.
    • Toss the chopped strawberries with flour before adding them to the batter to help prevent them from sinking.
    • Do not overmix the batter. Stir just until combined for the most tender texture.
    • If the top begins browning too quickly, loosely tent with foil during the last 10-15 minutes of baking.
    • Frozen strawberries can be used, but do not thaw them first. Toss them with flour before folding into the batter.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 396kcal | Carbohydrates: 59g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 42mg | Sodium: 291mg | Potassium: 135mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 36g | Vitamin A: 79IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 2mg

    Banana Cake with Brown Butter Frosting

    June 17, 2026

    Slice of banana cake with brown butter cream cheese frosting.

    This Banana Cake with Brown Butter Frosting is a soft, moist banana cake topped with a rich brown butter cream cheese frosting that tastes almost caramel-like. It’s an easy 9×13 cake that’s perfect for using overripe bananas, like for my banana bread recipe too, and has the kind of homemade flavor people remember long after the last slice is gone.

    An Easy Banana Cake That Feels Like an Old-Fashioned Favorite

    If you love recipes that feel like they came straight from a church potluck dessert table or family reunion, this banana cake belongs on your list. The texture stays soft and tender thanks to ripe bananas and buttermilk, while the brown butter frosting gives it a rich flavor that’s hard to stop thinking about.

    Slice of banana cake with brown butter cream cheese frosting.

    What makes this recipe work so well is the combination of sweet bananas and nutty brown butter. The frosting melts onto the cake with a creamy texture and adds a depth of flavor you don’t get from a traditional cream cheese frosting. Love more of a cream cheese frosting? You could make the frosting that goes on my hummingbird cake recipe instead!

    Whether you’re taking it to a potluck, serving it after Sunday dinner, or setting it out for a family birthday, it’s one of those cakes that never seems to leave leftovers behind.

    Brown butter frosting swirled on top of banana cake in 9x13 baking pan.

    FAQs

    Does this taste like banana bread?

    It has the same comforting banana flavor, but the texture is softer and more cake-like. The brown butter frosting also makes it feel much more like a dessert.

    Why brown the butter for the frosting?

    Browning the butter creates a rich, nutty flavor that gives the frosting incredible depth and makes it taste almost caramel-like.

    Can I use frozen bananas?

    Yes. Allow them to thaw completely and drain away any excess liquid before mashing.

    Can I add nuts or chocolate chips?

    Absolutely. Stir in about ½ cup chopped pecans, walnuts, or chocolate chips before baking.

    Can I make this cake ahead of time?

    Yes. In fact, many people think the flavor is even better the next day.

    How should I store banana cake?

    Because the frosting contains cream cheese, the cake should be stored covered in the refrigerator.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    For the Cake

    • 2¾ cups all-purpose flour - Provides the structure for the cake while keeping the crumb soft and tender.
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda - Helps the cake rise and creates a tender texture.
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder - Gives the cake additional lift.
    • ½ teaspoon salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances flavor.
    • ½ cup vegetable oil - Keeps the cake moist for days.
    • 1 cup granulated sugar - Sweetens the cake.
    • ½ cup light brown sugar, packed - Adds moisture and a subtle caramel flavor.
    • 2 large eggs - Provide structure and richness.
    • 1½ cups mashed overripe bananas (about 3-4 medium bananas) - Adds flavor, moisture, and natural sweetness.
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - Enhances the overall flavor.
    • ¾ cup buttermilk - Helps create a soft, tender crumb.

    For the Brown Butter Frosting

    • ½ cup salted butter - Browned first to create a rich, nutty flavor.
    • 8 ounces cream cheese, softened - Creates a creamy, tangy frosting.
    • 3-4 cups powdered sugar - Sweetens and thickens the frosting.
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - Adds warmth and flavor.
    • ¼ teaspoon salt - Balances the sweetness.
    Ingredients to make banana cake with brown butter frosting.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and grease a 9×13-inch baking pan.

    Before making the cake, prepare the brown butter for the frosting. Place the ½ cup salted butter in a medium saucepan over medium heat and cook, swirling occasionally, until it turns amber brown and smells nutty, about 5-7 minutes.

    Browned butter in saucepan.

    Pour the browned butter, including the browned bits, into a bowl and refrigerate until solidified but still soft enough to beat.

    In a medium bowl, whisk together the 2¾ cups all-purpose flour, 1 teaspoon baking soda, 1 teaspoon baking powder, and ½ teaspoon salt.

    Dry ingredients such as flour and salt in mixing bowl.

    In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the ½ cup vegetable oil, 1 cup granulated sugar, and ½ cup packed light brown sugar until combined.

    Eggs, oil and brown sugar in mixing bowl.

    Add the 2 eggs, 1½ cups mashed bananas, and 1 teaspoon vanilla extract. Mix until fully combined.

    Eggs and banana mixture added to mixing bowl.

    Gradually add the flour mixture and ¾ cup buttermilk alternately, mixing just until combined. Do not overmix.

    Flour mixture added to wet ingredients in mixing bowl for banana cake.

    Pour the batter into the prepared baking pan and spread evenly.

    Banana cake batter poured in to 9x13 baking dish.

    Bake for 35 to 40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.

    Allow the cake to cool completely.

    Baked banana cake in 9x13 baking pan.

    How to Make Brown Butter Frosting

    While the cake cools, prepare the frosting.

    Place the cooled brown butter and 8 ounces softened cream cheese in a large mixing bowl.

    Browned butter and cream cheese in mixing bowl for browned butter frosting.

    Beat until smooth and creamy.

    Add the 3 cups powdered sugar, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, and ¼ teaspoon salt.

    Powdered sugar added to mixing bowl for brown butter frosting.

    Beat until light and fluffy. Add additional powdered sugar as needed until you reach your desired consistency.

    Spread the frosting evenly over the completely cooled cake.

    Brown butter frosting spread on top of banana cake.

    Tips

    • Use bananas that are heavily spotted or mostly brown for the best banana flavor.
    • Watch the butter carefully while browning because it can burn quickly.
    • A light-colored saucepan makes it easier to see when the butter reaches the perfect amber color.
    • Allow the brown butter to cool to the consistency of softened butter before making the frosting.
    • Do not overmix the batter or the cake can become dense.
    • Chopped pecans or walnuts make a delicious addition to this recipe.
    • If the frosting becomes too thick, beat in a small splash of milk.
    Banana cake with brown butter frosting sliced in 9x13 pan.

    Storage

    Store the cake covered in the refrigerator for up to 5 days because of the cream cheese frosting.

    For the best texture, let a slice sit at room temperature for about 15 to 20 minutes before serving.

    Slice of banana cake with brown butter frosting, sitting on round plate, next to bananas.

    More Recipes

    If you love banana desserts and old-fashioned cake recipes like this one, then you’ll also love these favorites:

    • Banana Dump Cake
    • Banana Pudding Poke Cake
    • Easy Banana Pudding
    • Banana Pudding Brownies
    • Banana Bread Pudding

    Recipe

    Slice of banana cake with brown butter cream cheese frosting.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Banana Cake with Brown Butter Frosting

    This Banana Cake with Brown Butter Frosting is soft, moist, and topped with a rich, nutty frosting that makes every bite unforgettable.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 25 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 573kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Banana Cake:

    • 2 ¾ cups all-purpose flour spooned and leveled (344 grams)
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup vegetable oil
    • 1 cup granulated sugar
    • ½ cup light brown sugar packed
    • 2 large eggs
    • 1 ½ cups mashed overripe bananas about 3-4 medium sized bananas
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¾ cup buttermilk

    Brown Butter Frosting:

    • ½ cup salted butter (1 stick)
    • 8 ounces package cream cheese, softened
    • 3-4 cups powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon salt

    Instructions

    • Before making the cake, brown the butter for the brown butter frosting. Place the butter in a medium sized pan over medium heat, swirling until it turns amber brown and smells nutty, about 5-7 minutes.
    • Pour the browned butter into a bowl (including the dark bits) and place in the refrigerator to let it cool until solidified but still soft.
    • Preheat your oven to 350 degrees F and grease a 9×13 inch baking pan.
    • In a medium bowl, stir together the flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the granulated and brown sugars until light and fluffy.
    • Beat in the mashed bananas, eggs, and vanilla extract.
    • Gradually add the dry ingredients to the wet mixture, alternating with the buttermilk, starting and ending with the buttermilk. Do not overmix.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and bake for 35 to 40 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean. Set aside to cool completely.
    • To make the frosting, beat the solidified brown butter with the cream cheese until smooth, then add the powdered sugar, vanilla, and salt, whipping until light and fluffy. Add more powdered sugar until you have reached your desired consistency.
    • Spread the frosting evenly over the completely cooled cake.

    Notes

    • Use very ripe bananas with plenty of brown spots for the best flavor and moisture.
    • Watch the butter closely while browning, as it can go from perfectly browned to burnt quickly.
    • Allow the browned butter to cool until it’s softened but not hard before making the frosting.
    • Do not overmix the batter or the cake may become dense.
    • Let the cake cool completely before frosting.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 573kcal | Carbohydrates: 84g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 68mg | Sodium: 422mg | Potassium: 170mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 59g | Vitamin A: 567IU | Vitamin C: 2mg | Calcium: 75mg | Iron: 2mg

    Strawberry Upside Down Cake

    June 17, 2026

    A slice of strawberry upside down cake, being held above round cake.

    This Strawberry Upside Down Cake is an easy dessert made with fresh strawberries, brown sugar, and a simple yellow cake mix, making it semi-homemade, unlike this from-scratch orange upside-down cake. Once flipped, the strawberries create a beautiful topping that’s sweet, buttery, and full of old-fashioned strawberry flavor.

    An Easy Strawberry Cake That Feels Like a Springtime Classic

    If you love strawberry desserts that look impressive but don’t require a lot of work, this cake is one you’ll want to keep on repeat. The fresh strawberries bake into a jammy topping while the cake stays soft and tender underneath. It’s perfect as a potluck cake recipe, family dinners, church supper gatherings, or anytime strawberries are in season.

    A slice of strawberry upside down cake being held above the rest of the  cake.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Can I use frozen strawberries?

    Fresh strawberries work best for this recipe. Frozen strawberries release too much liquid as they thaw and bake, which can make the topping watery and prevent it from setting properly.

    Why do I need to flip the cake while it’s still warm?

    The brown sugar and butter mixture begins to firm up as it cools. Flipping the cake after about 10 minutes helps ensure the strawberry topping releases cleanly from the pan.

    How thick should I slice the strawberries?

    Slice the strawberries about ¼ to ½ inch thick. Thin slices tend to soften too much during baking, while thicker slices hold their shape and create a prettier topping.

    How many strawberries should I use?

    One pound of strawberries creates approximately two layers of fruit in the pan. This gives the finished cake plenty of strawberry flavor and helps prevent bare spots after flipping.

    Can I make this in a 9×13-inch pan?

    A 9-inch round cake pan works best. Testing showed that the cake bakes more evenly in a round pan, while larger pans can cause uneven baking and thinner topping coverage.

    What should I serve with strawberry upside down cake?

    It’s delicious on its own, but a dollop of whipped cream or a scoop of vanilla ice cream makes it even better.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    • ¼ cup unsalted butter, melted creates the rich base for the strawberry topping.
    • ½ teaspoon salt balances the sweetness and enhances the strawberry flavor.
    • ½ cup light brown sugar melts together with the butter to form a buttery caramel-like layer.
    • 2 teaspoons lemon juice brightens the strawberries and helps bring out their flavor.
    • 1 pound fresh strawberries, sliced thickly create the signature upside-down topping.
    • 1 box yellow cake mix keeps this recipe simple while creating a soft, fluffy cake.
    • 1 cup water helps create the cake batter.
    • ⅓ cup vegetable oil adds moisture and tenderness.
    • 3 large eggs provide structure and richness.
    Ingredients to make strawberry upside down cake on counter.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F.
    • Pour the ¼ cup melted butter, ½ teaspoon salt, and ½ cup light brown sugar into a 9-inch round cake pan. Stir together until combined.
    Melted butter, salt and brown sugar added to round cake pan.
    • In a bowl, toss the 1 pound thickly sliced strawberries with the 2 teaspoons lemon juice.
    • Arrange the strawberries over the brown sugar mixture, slightly overlapping them as needed. Two layers of strawberries work best for good coverage.
    Strawberries added on top of brown sugar mixture in cake pan.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the yellow cake mix, 1 cup water, ⅓ cup vegetable oil, and 3 eggs. Mix until smooth and fully combined.
    Yellow cake mix, oil and eggs mixed together in mixing bowl.
    • Carefully pour the cake batter over the strawberries. Fill the pan about three-quarters full. Depending on the cake mix brand, you may have a small amount of batter leftover. If so, bake 1 or 2 cupcakes with the extra batter.
    Cake batter poured over strawberries in cake pan.
    • Bake for 38-42 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
    • Allow the cake to cool for 10 minutes.
    Baked strawberry upside down cake in round pan.
    • Place a serving platter or cake stand over the pan and carefully invert the cake.
    Baked strawberry upside down cake on cake stand.
    • Serve warm or cooled. If desired, top with whipped cream before serving.

    Tips

    • Use ripe strawberries for the best flavor.
    • Slice strawberries thickly so they hold their shape during baking.
    • Pack the strawberries closely together since they shrink as they bake.
    • Place a baking sheet underneath the cake pan in the oven to catch any bubbling juices.
    • Don’t wait too long to flip the cake or the topping may stick to the pan.
    • For a slightly richer cake, substitute milk for the water in the batter.
    A slice of strawberry upside down cake on a round plate with a fork.

    Storage

    Store the cake covered at room temperature for up to 1 day.

    For longer storage, keep it covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    To serve after refrigerating, warm individual slices in the microwave for 10-15 seconds if desired.

    Freezing

    This cake is not ideal for freezing. The strawberries release moisture after thawing, which can affect both the appearance and texture of the topping.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    • Strawberry Texas Sheet Cake
    • Strawberry Shortcake Sheet Cake
    • Strawberry Jello Cake

    Recipe

    A slice of strawberry upside down cake, being held above round cake.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Upside Down Cake

    This Strawberry Upside Down Cake features a buttery brown sugar strawberry topping baked over a soft yellow cake for an easy dessert that's perfect for strawberry season.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 38 minutes minutes
    Total Time 53 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 225kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • ¼ cup unsalted butter melted
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup light brown sugar
    • 2 teaspoons lemon juice
    • 1 pound strawberries sliced thickly
    • yellow cake mix
    • 1 cup water
    • ⅓ cup vegetable oil
    • 3 eggs

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F.
    • Add the melted butter, salt and brown sugar to the cake pan. Stir to combine.
    • Add the lemon juice over top of the strawberries and toss to combine.
    • Place the sliced strawberries over the brown sugar mixture. You should end up with about 2 layers of strawberries.
    • In a large mixing bowl add the yellow cake mix, water, vegetable oil, and eggs, stir until well combined.
    • Pour the batter over top until the cake pan is ¾ full of batter. You may have a small amount left, that you can transfer to a cupcake pan (it can make between 1-2 cupcakes).
    • Bake at 350 degrees F for 38-42 minutes or until a toothpick comes out clean from the center of the cake.
    • Allow the cake to cool for 10 minutes.
    • Turn the cake out onto a platter or cake stand, and serve warm or cooled. Optional: serve with some whipped topping.

    Notes

    • Use fresh strawberries rather than frozen for the best texture and appearance.
    • Slice the strawberries about ¼ to ½ inch thick so they hold their shape while baking.
    • Arrange the strawberries snugly together, as they will shrink slightly as they bake.
    • Let the cake cool for only about 10 minutes before flipping to help prevent the topping from sticking to the pan.
    • A 9-inch round cake pan works best for even baking and the prettiest presentation.
    • Depending on the brand of cake mix used, you may have a small amount of batter leftover. Bake any extra batter as cupcakes.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 225kcal | Carbohydrates: 18g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 77mg | Sodium: 175mg | Potassium: 131mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 273IU | Vitamin C: 34mg | Calcium: 32mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Earthquake Cake

    June 15, 2026

    A slice of strawberry earthquake cake on a plate with fork.

    This Strawberry Earthquake Cake is a gooey strawberry dessert that’s filled with pockets of sweet cream cheese, white chocolate chips, and real strawberries.

    An Easy Strawberry Dessert That Looks Fancy Without the Work

    Made with a simple box cake mix, like this strawberry cream cheese dump cake that uses similar ingredients, this easy dessert bakes into a rich, swirled cake that’s perfect for potlucks, holidays, baby showers, and family gatherings. The best part is that it’s supposed to look imperfect, making it one of the easiest impressive desserts you’ll ever make.

    A slice of strawberry earthquake cake on a plate.

    If you love old-fashioned cake recipes but have never made an earthquake cake before, make sure you add this one to your recipe box.

    Now, don’t worry about getting perfect swirls or a smooth top. The cracks, pockets, and uneven appearance are exactly what give this cake its name.

    As the cake bakes, the cream cheese filling settles into the strawberry cake batter, creating creamy cheesecake-like pockets throughout. Combined with melted white chocolate chips and bursts of strawberry flavor, every bite is rich, sweet, and completely irresistible.

    Since it starts with a cake mix, it’s also one of those desserts that’s simple enough for beginner bakers but special enough for celebrations.

    A baked strawberry earthquake cake.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Can I use frozen strawberries?

    Yes. Frozen strawberries work well in this recipe. Simply chop them if needed and pat them dry before adding them to the filling to remove excess moisture.

    Can I skip the almond extract?

    Absolutely. The cake will still be delicious without it, although the almond extract adds a subtle bakery-style flavor that pairs beautifully with strawberries.

    Why is my cream cheese filling lumpy?

    This usually happens if the cream cheese isn’t fully softened. Small lumps are perfectly fine and will melt into the cake while baking.

    Can I use a different cake mix flavor?

    Yes. White cake mix, vanilla cake mix, or even chocolate cake mix can work well with the cream cheese filling.

    How do I know when the cake is done?

    The edges should be set and the center should still look slightly underbaked. The center should not be liquid, but it should remain gooey.

    Can I add more strawberries?

    You can, but too many strawberries may add excess moisture and prevent the cake from setting properly.

    Ingredients

    You can also find the full list of ingredients and instructions at the bottom of this post inside of the printable recipe card.

    Ingredients for strawberry earthquake cake on counter.
    • 1 box (13.25-ounce) strawberry cake mix: Creates the strawberry-flavored base of the cake and keeps this recipe quick and easy.
    • 1 cup water: Helps bring the cake batter together.
    • ¼ cup vegetable oil: Adds moisture and keeps the cake soft and tender.
    • 3 eggs: Provide structure and richness to the cake.
    • 1 cup white chocolate chips: Melt into the cake while baking, creating creamy pockets of sweetness.
    • 8 ounces cream cheese, softened: Creates the rich, tangy filling that makes earthquake cake so irresistible.
    • ½ cup unsalted butter, melted: Adds richness and helps create a smooth filling.
    • ½ teaspoon salt: Balances the sweetness and enhances the flavors.
    • 3 cups powdered sugar: Sweetens and thickens the cream cheese mixture.
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract: Adds warmth and depth of flavor.
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract: Gives the filling a subtle bakery-style flavor that pairs beautifully with strawberries.
    • ½ cup chopped strawberries (fresh or frozen, patted dry): Adds fresh strawberry flavor and texture throughout the cake.

    Supplies Needed

    • 9×13-inch baking dish
    • Large mixing bowl
    • Medium mixing bowl
    • Hand mixer or stand mixer
    • Measuring cups and spoons
    • Rubber spatula
    • Butter knife

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven to 350°F and grease a 9×13-inch baking dish.

    In a large mixing bowl, combine the 13.25-ounce box strawberry cake mix, 1 cup water, ¼ cup vegetable oil, and 3 eggs. Mix until just combined.

    Strawberry cake mix, eggs, oil, and water in mixing bowl.

    Pour the batter evenly into the prepared baking dish.

    Strawberry cake batter poured in to 9x13 baking dish.

    Sprinkle 1 cup white chocolate chips evenly over the batter.

    White chocolate chips poured on top of cake batter.

    In a separate bowl, beat together 8 ounces softened cream cheese and ½ cup melted unsalted butter until combined. The mixture may still have a few small lumps, which is completely fine.

    Add 1 teaspoon vanilla extract and ½ teaspoon almond extract and mix until combined.

    Gradually add 3 cups powdered sugar and ½ teaspoon salt. Mix until thick and smooth.

    Cream cheese mixture in mixing bowl for the strawberry earthquake cake.

    Fold in ½ cup chopped strawberries.

    Strawberries added to cream cheese mixture in mixing bowl.

    Drop spoonfuls of the cream cheese mixture all over the cake batter.

    Using a butter knife, gently swirl the cream cheese mixture into the batter. Do not overmix. You want visible pockets and swirls throughout the cake.

    Cream cheese mixture added to strawberry cake mix batter in 9x13 baking dish.

    Bake for 50 to 55 minutes or until the edges are set and the center is slightly gooey.

    Allow the cake to cool for about 1 hour before serving so the filling can set slightly.

    Baked strawberry earthquake cake in 9x13 baking dish.

    Storage Instructions

    Store covered at room temperature for up to 1 day.

    For longer storage, cover and refrigerate for up to 5 days.

    For the best texture, allow refrigerated slices to come to room temperature before serving or warm them slightly in the microwave.

    This cake is not recommended for freezing, as the cream cheese filling and strawberries can become watery after thawing.

    Showing inside of earthquake cake, and cream cheese layers.

    Recipe Tips

    • The center will not pass a traditional toothpick test, and that’s normal.
    • Avoid overbaking. The center should still be slightly gooey when removed from the oven.
    • Don’t over-swirl the cream cheese mixture into the batter or you’ll lose the signature earthquake effect.
    • Pat strawberries dry before adding them to the filling to prevent excess moisture.
    • Room-temperature cream cheese will give you the smoothest filling.
    • If using frozen strawberries, use them straight from frozen after patting them dry.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    • Strawberry Texas Sheet Cake
    • Strawberry Shortcake Sheet Cake
    • Strawberry Poke Cake
    • Cherry Sheet Cake

    Recipe

    A slice of strawberry earthquake cake on a plate with fork.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Earthquake Cake

    This Strawberry Earthquake Cake is a gooey strawberry dessert made with cake mix, cream cheese filling, white chocolate chips, and fresh strawberries.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 slices
    Calories 522kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 13.25 ounce box strawberry cake mix
    • 1 cup water
    • ¼ cup vegetable oil
    • 3 eggs
    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
    • ½ cup unsalted butter melted
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 3 cups powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract adjust to taste
    • 1 cup white chocolate chips
    • ½ cup chopped strawberries fresh or frozen, patted dry

    Instructions

    • Grease a 9×13 pan, set aside. Preheat oven to 350 degrees F.
    • In a large bowl, prepare the strawberry cake batter by mixing the cake mix, water, oil, and eggs until just combined.
    • Pour evenly into the prepared pan.
    • Sprinkle white chocolate chips evenly over the batter. Set aside.
    • In a bowl, beat together the softened cream cheese and melted butter. Mix until combined (you will notice it a little lumpy; that is okay).
    • Add the vanilla extract and almond extract. Mix to combine.
    • Slowly add the powdered sugar. Mix until smooth and thick.
    • Add the chopped strawberries and fold them in.
    • Drop spoonfuls of the cream cheese mixture all over the top of the cake batter.
    • Using a butter knife, lightly swirl the cream cheese into the batter, but don't fully mix it in.
    • Bake for 50-55 minutes or until the edges are set and the center is slightly gooey and not fully firm.
    • Cool for 1 hour before serving so the filling can set slightly.

    Notes

    • Do not use the toothpick test to determine doneness. The cream cheese filling will keep the center soft and gooey.
    • The cake is done when the edges are set and the center is slightly jiggly but not liquid.
    • Pat strawberries dry before adding them to the filling to prevent excess moisture.
    • Use room-temperature cream cheese for the smoothest filling.
    • Don’t over-swirl the cream cheese mixture into the batter. Leaving larger pockets creates the signature earthquake cake effect.
    • Allow the cake to cool for at least 1 hour before serving so the filling can set properly.
    • If using frozen strawberries, chop and pat them dry before adding them to the filling.
    • Store leftovers in the refrigerator and bring to room temperature before serving for the best texture.
     
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 522kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 14g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 83mg | Sodium: 399mg | Potassium: 96mg | Fiber: 0.1g | Sugar: 55g | Vitamin A: 555IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 117mg | Iron: 1mg

    Chocolate Gooey Butter Cookies

    June 13, 2026

    caramel drizzling on chocolate gooey butter cookie

    Chocolate Gooey Butter Cookies made with a Devil’s Food Cake Mix (or any chocolate cake mix you’d like, makes these some of the easiest and best cookie recipes. (Along with this Rocky Road Cookies recipe and these Devil’s Food Chocolate Cookies that use a cake mix too, of course!)

    Chocolate Caramel Gooey Butter Cookies

    At first, I really didn’t think it could get much better than the original gooey butter cookie. I swore it was the best cookie I ever had.

    But now… although those are still amazingly delicious… I bring you the ultimate gooey butter cookie: Chocolate Gooey Butter Cookies.

    But then we also took things up a notch for Christmas and made these reindeer cookies!

    Ingredients

    With only a few ingredients (and ingredients that you more than likely have on hand), these cookies can be made in a jiffy and last-minute!

    • 8-ounce package cream cheese softened
    • ½ cup (1 stick) butter softened
    • ¼ teaspoon vanilla
    • 1 egg
    • 1 devils food box cake mix (we also use this for these turtle cookies!)
    • ¾ cup powdered sugar
    • caramel drizzle for the top if you want a little flair
    Ingredients for chocolate caramel gooey butter cookies

    Instructions

    1. Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit
    2. Mix together cream cheese, and butter until well blended.
    3. Add in vanilla, egg, cake mix until combined.
    4. Roll into 1 in. size balls
    5. Roll each ball in powdered sugar
    Rolled gooey butter cookies - chocolate caramel
    1. Bake on a greased baking sheet at 350 for 12 minutes.
    Baked chocolate gooey butter cookies with caramel. This recipe is easy and delicious
    1. Remove from baking sheet and drizzle each cookie with caramel and additional powdered sugar if desired.
    Easy chocolate cookie recipe with cream cheese, cake mix and powdered sugar

    Caramel Drizzle Tidbit

    Once the cookies have cooled, drizzle on the caramel sauce. (We used ice cream topping to keep things super simple. This didn’t harden, so if you’re looking for something to harden more, melting caramel candies may work better for you!)

    After cooled, drizzle more caramel on to the gooey butter cookies

    Love caramel in your cookies too? This Twix cookie recipe is definitely one to try.

    Mmmm! Chocolate Caramel gooey butter cookie recipe. So easy and delicious!

    They won’t last long, and you’ll eat WAY more than you should. As a mom who loves her children unconditionally and would do anything for them… I still hid this batch and ate almost every single one -without sharing!

    Let chocolate caramel gooey butter cookies cool on the wire rack

    Substitutions

    Although the chocolate devil’s food cake mix is absolutely delicious, you can absolutely switch out the cake mix for your favorite!

    Try red velvet cookies, or even funfetti cookies with a cake mix!

    Oh my WORD! Chocolate Caramel Gooey Butter Cookies! These are so easy, and the caramel drizzle and adding it to the batter takes this original cookie to a whole new level with a chocolate cake mix

    More recipes you’ll love:

    Thank you so much for coming by, and don’t forget to check out the other fun dessert recipes, such as these caramel cupcakes with a caramel buttercream frosting and this chocolate bread and butter pudding.

    Recipe

    caramel drizzling on chocolate gooey butter cookie
    Print Pin
    5 from 4 votes

    Chocolate Gooey Butter Cookies

    Chocolate Gooey Butter Cookies: An easy chocolate cake mix cookie that uses just a few ingredients with cream cheese to give it that gooey texture.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 12 minutes minutes
    Total Time 27 minutes minutes
    Servings 30 cookies (number may vary depending on size)
    Calories 137kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounce cream cheese softened
    • ½ cup (1 stick) butter softened
    • ¼ teaspoon vanilla
    • 1 egg
    • 1 devils food box cake mix
    • ¾ cup powdered sugar
    • ¾ cup salted caramel ice cream topping if desired for topping

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit
    • Mix together cream cheese, and butter until well blended.
    • Add in vanilla, egg, and cake mix
    • Roll into 1 in. size balls
    • Roll each ball in powdered sugar
    • Bake on a greased baking sheet at 350 for 12 minutes.
    • Remove from baking sheet and drizzle each cookie with remaining caramel and additional powdered sugar if desired.

    Video

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 137kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 23mg | Sodium: 173mg | Potassium: 67mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 222IU | Vitamin C: 0.02mg | Calcium: 35mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Shortcake Sheet Cake

    June 12, 2026

    A slice of strawberry shortcake sheet cake on a round plate.

    This Strawberry Shortcake Sheet Cake combines a soft vanilla cake, fluffy whipped cream frosting, and fresh strawberries into an easy dessert that’s perfect for feeding a crowd. It has all the flavors of classic strawberry shortcake but in a simple 9×13 cake that’s easier to make, transport, and serve.

    Whether you’re making dessert for a summer cookout, baby shower, birthday party, or potluck meal, this cake delivers that nostalgic strawberries-and-cream flavor everyone loves.

    An Easy Strawberry Dessert That Feels Like a Classic

    If you’ve ever loved traditional strawberry shortcake but wished it were easier to serve for a crowd, this cake is the answer.

    A slice of strawberry shortcake sheet cake sitting on a round plate.

    Instead of layering biscuits, whipped cream, and strawberries individually, everything comes together in one easy sheet cake. The vanilla cake stays soft and moist thanks to Greek yogurt and buttermilk, while the whipped cream frosting gets extra stability from cream cheese so it slices beautifully.

    The fresh strawberries on top give it that classic strawberry shortcake flavor, and if you want even more strawberry goodness, you can toss the berries with a little sugar before adding them to the cake.

    It’s the kind of dessert that looks impressive but is surprisingly simple to make.

    FAQs

    Can I use frozen strawberries?

    Fresh strawberries are recommended for the best texture. Frozen strawberries release quite a bit of liquid as they thaw, which can make the topping watery.

    Why add cream cheese to the whipped cream frosting?

    The cream cheese helps stabilize the whipped cream so it holds its shape longer and makes the cake easier to slice and serve.

    How do I know when the whipped cream has reached stiff peaks?

    When you lift the beaters from the bowl, the whipped cream should stand up firmly without collapsing.

    Can I make this cake ahead of time?

    Yes. The cake can be baked a day in advance. For the freshest results, add the frosting and strawberries the day you plan to serve it.

    Does this cake need to stay refrigerated?

    Yes. Because of the whipped cream frosting, the cake should be stored in the refrigerator.

    Can I use Cool Whip instead of homemade whipped topping?

    Yes. However, the homemade whipped frosting gives the cake a fresher flavor and lighter texture that’s much closer to traditional strawberry shortcake.

    Can I use sour cream instead of Greek yogurt?

    Yes. Full-fat sour cream can be substituted in equal amounts.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below for the printable full recipe, including ingredient amounts and detailed instructions.

    Ingredients on kitchen counter to make strawberry shortcake sheet cake.

    For the Cake

    • 2¼ cups all-purpose flour - Gives the cake structure while keeping it soft and tender.
    • 1½ teaspoons baking powder - Helps the cake rise.
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda - Works with the buttermilk and Greek yogurt to create a fluffy texture.
    • ½ teaspoon salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances flavor.
    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened - Adds richness and buttery flavor.
    • 1½ cups granulated sugar - Sweetens the cake and helps keep it moist.
    • 3 eggs, room temperature - Provide structure and stability.
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract - Adds warm vanilla flavor throughout the cake.
    • ¾ cup Greek yogurt - Helps create an extra moist crumb.
    • ¾ cup buttermilk - Adds tenderness and a subtle tang.

    For the Frosting

    • 2 cups heavy whipping cream - Creates a light, fluffy frosting.
    • ½ cup powdered sugar - Sweetens and helps stabilize the whipped cream.
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract - Adds flavor to the frosting.
    • ½ cup cream cheese, softened - Helps stabilize the frosting while adding a slight tang.

    For the Topping

    2 cups fresh strawberries, chopped - Add fresh strawberry flavor and the classic shortcake experience.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Grease a 9×13-inch baking dish and set aside.

    In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the 2¼ cups all-purpose flour, 1½ teaspoons baking powder, ½ teaspoon baking soda, and ½ teaspoon salt. Set aside.

    Flour, and dry ingredients in mixing bowl.

    In a separate mixing bowl, beat together the ½ cup softened unsalted butter and 1½ cups granulated sugar until light and fluffy.

    Butter and sugar in mixing bowl.

    Add the 3 eggs one at a time, mixing well between each addition.

    Eggs added to sugar and butter mixture in mixing bowl.

    Mix in the 1 tablespoon vanilla extract and ¾ cup Greek yogurt until fully combined.

    Greek yogurt and vanilla added to butter and sugar in mixing bowl.

    Alternately add the flour mixture and the ¾ cup buttermilk, beginning and ending with the dry ingredients. Mix just until combined, being careful not to overmix.

    Dry ingredients added to wet mixture in mixing bowl.

    Spread the batter evenly into the prepared pan.

    Bake for 25 to 30 minutes or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.

    Strawberry shortcake sheet cake batter in 9x13 baking dish.

    Allow the cake to cool completely, about 1 hour.

    While the cake cools, prepare the frosting.

    Baked strawberry shortcake in a 9x13 baking dish.

    How to Make Frosting for Strawberry Shortcake Cake

    In a large mixing bowl, beat the 2 cups heavy whipping cream until it begins to thicken.

    Add the ½ cup powdered sugar and 2 teaspoons vanilla extract. Continue beating until stiff peaks form.

    Heavy whipping cream and vanilla in mixing bowl.

    In a separate bowl, beat the ½ cup softened cream cheese until smooth.

    Add a large spoonful of whipped cream to the cream cheese and beat until fully incorporated. This helps thin the cream cheese and prevents lumps.

    Cream cheese mixed with whipped cream.

    Gently fold the cream cheese mixture into the remaining whipped cream until fully combined.

    Spread the frosting over the cooled cake.

    Cream cheese whipped cream spread on baked cake.

    Top with the 2 cups chopped strawberries.

    Strawberry shortcake topped with diced strawberries.

    Refrigerate for at least 1 hour before serving to help the frosting set.

    Tips

    • Allow the cake to cool completely before adding the frosting.
    • Use room-temperature eggs for a smoother batter.
    • Do not overmix once the flour is added or the cake may become dense.
    • Chill your mixing bowl and beaters before whipping the cream for the best texture.
    • Pat strawberries dry if they’re especially juicy.
    • For even more strawberry flavor, toss the strawberries with ¼ to ⅓ cup granulated sugar and let them sit for 15 minutes before topping the cake.
    • The method of thinning the cream cheese with a spoonful of whipped cream helps create a smooth frosting without lumps.
    Strawberry drizzle being spooned over the top of a slice of strawberry shortcake.

    Storage

    Store the cake covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days.

    The unfrosted cake can be frozen for up to 2 months. Wrap tightly in plastic wrap and thaw overnight before frosting and serving.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    Strawberry Texas Sheet Cake

    A moist strawberry cake topped with a rich strawberry frosting that’s always a crowd favorite.

    Strawberry Cream Cheese Icebox Cake

    An easy dessert packed with strawberry flavor and a creamy topping.

    Pineapple Sunshine Cake

    A vintage-style dessert that’s light, fluffy, and perfect for potlucks.

    Hummingbird Sheet Cake

    A Southern classic loaded with banana, pineapple, and cream cheese frosting.

    Recipe

    A slice of strawberry shortcake sheet cake on a round plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Shortcake Sheet Cake

    This Strawberry Shortcake Sheet Cake combines a soft, buttery vanilla cake with a light whipped cream frosting and fresh strawberries for an easy crowd-pleasing dessert that's perfect for potlucks, summer parties, and family gatherings.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 25 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 482kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Cake

    • 2 ¼ cups all purpose flour
    • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup unsalted butter softened
    • 1 ½ cup granulated sugar
    • 3 eggs room temperature
    • 1 tablespoon vanilla extract
    • ¾ cup greek yogurt
    • ¾ cup buttermilk

    Frosting

    • 2 cups heavy cream
    • ½ cup powdered sugar
    • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ cup cream cheese softened
    • 2 cups strawberries chopped

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Grease a 9×13 pan and set aside.
    • In a large mixing bowl combine the all purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda and salt. Set aside.
    • Add the granulated sugar and softened unsalted butter, mix them thoroughly in a mixing bowl.
    • Add the eggs one at a time, fully incorporating the eggs between each addition.
    • Mix in the vanilla extract and the Greek yogurt until well combined.
    • Using a spatula, slowly add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients by adding about 1 cup at a time followed by a small amount of buttermilk. Repeat this process (finishing with buttermilk) until the flour mixture and the buttermilk is fully combined, avoiding to over mix the batter.
    • Transfer the batter to the prepared 9×13 pan.
    • A toothpick should come out clean in the center of the cake after 25 to 30 minutes of baking at 350 degrees F.
    • Allow to cool for at least 1 hour before topping.
    • To a mixing bowl add the heavy cream, beat until the cream just starts to thicken.
    • Add the powdered sugar and beat until well combined. Add the vanilla extract and beat until stiff peaks form. Set aside.
    • In a mixing bowl add the softened cream cheese beat until fully softened and beaten.
    • Add a heaping spoonful of the whipped cream to the cream cheese. Beat until fully combined.
    • Transfer the cream cheese mixture to the whipped cream and stir to fully combine.
    • Top the fully cooled cake with the whipped topping.
    • Finish off the cake by topping with the chopped strawberries. Transfer the cake to the refrigerator and allow to cool for 1 hour before serving to help firm up the frosting.

    Notes

    • Allow the cake to cool completely before frosting. Even slight warmth can cause the whipped cream frosting to melt and slide.
    • To prevent lumps, beat a spoonful of whipped cream into the cream cheese before combining it with the remaining whipped cream. This helps create a smooth, stable frosting.
    • Do not overmix the batter once the flour is added. Overmixing can result in a denser cake.
    • Fresh strawberries are recommended. Frozen strawberries release excess liquid that can make the topping watery.
    • For extra strawberry flavor, toss the chopped strawberries with ¼ to ⅓ cup sugar and let them sit for 15 minutes before topping the cake.
    • Refrigerate the finished cake for at least 1 hour before serving to help the frosting firm up for cleaner slices.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 482kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 27g | Saturated Fat: 17g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 118mg | Sodium: 274mg | Potassium: 171mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 34g | Vitamin A: 1034IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 2mg

    Cherry Sheet Cake

    June 3, 2026

    A slice of cherry sheet cake on a plate.

    Cherry Sheet Cake is a soft, buttery 9×13 cake filled with sweet maraschino cherries and topped with a simple almond frosting, similar to this round cherry chip cake recipe. It’s an easy dessert that’s perfect for potlucks, holidays, family gatherings, and anytime you’re craving an old-fashioned cake that feels a little special.

    A Potluck Cake That Always Gets People Talking

    A slice of cherry chip sheet cake on a round plate.

    There are certain desserts that disappear long before the meal is over, and this cherry sheet cake is one of them.

    Like this cherry blondies recipe, the combination of sweet cherries and almond extract gives it that classic bakery-style flavor people instantly recognize, while the tender cake stays moist for days.

    It’s simple enough for a weeknight dessert but pretty enough to bring to a church supper, baby shower, holiday gathering, or family reunion. If you’re a fan of old-fashioned desserts that don’t require complicated ingredients or decorating skills, this is the kind of recipe you’ll want to keep in your recipe box.

    A slice of cherry sheet cake resting on spatula.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Can I make this cake ahead of time?

    Yes. You can bake the cake a day ahead, cover it tightly, and frost it the next day before serving.

    Can I freeze cherry sheet cake?

    Yes. Freeze the unfrosted cake tightly wrapped for up to 2 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator before frosting and serving.

    Can I use fresh or frozen cherries?

    I don’t recommend it for this recipe. Maraschino cherries and their juice provide the flavor, sweetness, and moisture this cake was developed around.

    Do I have to use almond extract?

    No, but it’s highly recommended. Almond extract is what gives cherry desserts that classic flavor most people expect.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store covered at room temperature for up to 3 days or in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients to make cherry sheet cake, sitting on table.

    For the Cake

    • 2½ cups all-purpose flour - Gives the cake structure while keeping it soft and tender.
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder - Helps the cake rise.
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda - Works with the dairy ingredients for a light texture.
    • ½ teaspoon salt - Balances the sweetness.
    • ¾ cup unsalted butter, softened - Adds richness and moisture.
    • 1½ cups granulated sugar - Sweetens the cake and creates a tender crumb.
    • 3 large eggs, room temperature - Add structure and richness.
    • ¾ cup buttermilk - Helps create a moist, tender cake.
    • ½ cup Greek yogurt - Adds moisture and richness.
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - Adds warmth and flavor.
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract - Enhances the cherry flavor.
    • 1 (10-ounce) jar maraschino cherries, chopped, with juice reserved - Provides cherry flavor throughout the cake.

    For the Frosting

    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened - Creates a creamy frosting base.
    • 3 cups powdered sugar - Sweetens and thickens the frosting.
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract - Adds flavor.
    • ⅛ teaspoon almond extract - Complements the cherry flavor.
    • 2 to 3 tablespoons milk - Thins the frosting to a spreadable consistency.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Spray a 9×13-inch baking dish with baking spray and set aside.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the 2½ cups all-purpose flour, 2 teaspoons baking powder, ½ teaspoon baking soda, and ½ teaspoon salt.
    Dry ingredients in mixing bowl.
    • In a large mixing bowl, beat the ¾ cup softened butter and 1½ cups granulated sugar until combined.
    Sugar and butter in mixing bowl.
    • Add the 3 eggs, one at a time, mixing well after each addition.
    Egg added to sugar and butter in mixing bowl.
    • Mix in the ½ cup Greek yogurt, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, and ½ teaspoon almond extract.
    Greek yogurt added to sugar, egg and butter mixture in mixing bowl.
    • Stir in about 3 tablespoons of the reserved maraschino cherry juice.
    Cherry juice added to cake batter in mixing bowl.
    • Add half of the flour mixture and mix just until combined. Add half of the ¾ cup buttermilk and mix again. Repeat with the remaining flour mixture and remaining buttermilk.
    Flour mixture added to cake batter in mixing bowl for cherry cake recipe.
    • Fold in the chopped maraschino cherries.
    Cherries added to cherry cake batter in mixing bowl.
    • Spread the batter evenly into the prepared baking dish.
    Cherry cake batter poured in to 9x13 baking dish.
    • Bake for 35 to 40 minutes or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    • Allow the cake to cool completely, about 1 hour.
    Baked cherry chip sheet cake in 9x13 baking pan.

    How to Make Frosting for Cherry Cake

    • For the frosting, beat together the ½ cup softened butter, 3 cups powdered sugar, ½ teaspoon vanilla extract, and ⅛ teaspoon almond extract. Add 2 to 3 tablespoons milk, one tablespoon at a time, until the frosting reaches a smooth, spreadable consistency.
    Powdered sugar and butter in mixing bowl.
    • Spread the frosting evenly over the cooled cake.
    • Garnish with additional maraschino cherries if desired before slicing and serving.
    Cherry sheet cake frosted with icing and cherries.

    Tips

    • Drain the cherries well before chopping to prevent excess moisture in the cake.
    • Chop the cherries into small pieces so they distribute evenly throughout the batter.
    • Use room-temperature butter, eggs, and yogurt for the smoothest batter.
    • Mix only until the ingredients are combined to keep the cake tender.
    • Start checking for doneness around the 35-minute mark to avoid overbaking.
    A slice of cherry cake on a plate, with a bite taken out.

    More Cherry Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love that nostalgic cherry flavor, you’ll also love these:

    • cherry bread recipe
    • cherry dump cake
    • cherry yum yum

    Recipe

    A slice of cherry sheet cake on a plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Cherry Sheet Cake

    Cherry Sheet Cake is a soft, buttery 9×13 cake filled with sweet maraschino cherries and topped with a simple almond frosting. It's an easy, old-fashioned dessert that's perfect for potlucks, holidays, and family gatherings.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 35 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 550kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 ½ cups all purpose flour
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup unsalted butter softened
    • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar
    • 3 eggs room temperature
    • ¾ cup buttermilk
    • ½ cup Greek yogurt
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ teaspoon almond extract
    • 10 oz jar maraschino cherries cherries chopped and juice separated for later use

    Frosting Ingredients

    • ½ cup unsalted butter
    • 3 cups powdered sugar
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ⅛ teaspoon almond extract
    • 2-3 tablespoons milk

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F. Spray a 9×13 baking dish with some baking spray and set aside.
    • To a mixing bowl, add the all purpose flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Stir to combine and set aside.
    • Add the sugar and softened unsalted butter to a different mixing bowl. Using an electric mixer combine the butter and sugar together just until combined.
    • Next add the eggs one at a time incorporating them well between each addition.
    • Add the Greek yogurt, vanilla extract, and almond extract. Stir to combine.
    • Next, add the reserved maraschino cherry juice (about 3 tablespoons). Stir to combine.
    • Add half of the dry ingredients, stir to combine, then add half of the buttermilk, stir to combine. Repeat this process until the dry ingredients and buttermilk are just combined.
    • Fold in the chopped maraschino cherries.
    • Transfer the batter to the prepared baking dish. Spread the batter out evenly.
    • Bake the cake for 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick comes out clean.
    • Allow the cake to cool for at least 1 hour before frosting the cake.
    • To a mixing bowl, add the powdered sugar, vanilla extract, and almond extract, beat to combine, adding in some milk 1 tablespoon at a time to thin out the frosting.
    • Once the cake has cooled, add the frosting to the top of the cake. Using a spatula, spread the frosting out so it's evenly distributed. Optional: top with whole cherries for added decoration.
    • Cut and serve.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 550kcal | Carbohydrates: 86g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 21g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 94mg | Sodium: 253mg | Potassium: 92mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 65g | Vitamin A: 691IU | Calcium: 98mg | Iron: 2mg

    Cherry Blondies

    May 30, 2026

    Cherry Blondies stacked on top of one another.

    Cherry Blondies are buttery, chewy dessert bars filled with sweet maraschino cherries and almond flavor. If you grew up loving cherry chip cake, these blondies have that same nostalgic flavor in a rich, easy-to-make dessert that’s perfect for holidays, bake sales, and everyday treats.

    Cherry blondies stacked on top of each other.

    The Kind of Dessert People Ask You to Bring Again

    Some recipes are good.

    Some recipes disappear before they’ve even fully cooled.

    These cherry blondies fall firmly into the second category.

    The combination of maraschino cherries and almond extract creates that classic cherry-almond flavor, like in this cherry sheet cake, that’s been showing up in bakeries, church cookbooks, and family dessert tables for years. It’s sweet, buttery, nostalgic, and somehow manages to taste even better the next day.

    Getting the texture right took a little testing. Too much cherry juice made them cakey. Too many cherries added more moisture. After adjusting the balance of butter, sugar, and cherry juice, these blondies landed exactly where they should be: dense, chewy, buttery, and packed with cherry flavor in every bite.

    Whether you’re making them for Valentine’s Day, a holiday dessert tray, a bake sale, or simply because you’re craving something different, these are the kind of dessert bars people remember.

    Cherry blondies cut in to pieces and arranged on parchment paper.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    What is a blondie?

    A blondie is often described as the vanilla cousin of a brownie. Instead of chocolate, blondies rely on butter, sugar, and vanilla for their flavor and are known for their rich, chewy texture.

    Can I make these ahead of time?

    Yes. In fact, they’re even better the next day after the flavors have had time to develop.

    Why do I need to dry the cherries?

    Maraschino cherries contain a lot of liquid. Patting them dry before adding them to the batter helps prevent excess moisture and keeps the blondies from becoming cakey.

    How should I store cherry blondies?

    Store the blondies in an airtight container at room temperature for up to 3 days.
    For a firmer texture, refrigerate them for up to 1 week.

    Can I freeze them?

    Yes. Freeze sliced blondies in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw at room temperature before serving.

    Can I use fresh cherries instead?

    This recipe was developed using maraschino cherries. Fresh cherries will change both the flavor and moisture content of the blondies.

    Can I add white chocolate chips?

    Absolutely. White chocolate pairs beautifully with the cherry-almond flavor combination.

    How do I know when they’re done?

    The edges should appear set while the center still looks slightly soft. A toothpick inserted in the center should come out with a few moist crumbs attached.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients on counter to make cherry blondies.
    • 1 cup unsalted butter, melted - Creates the rich, buttery flavor and chewy texture that makes these blondies so irresistible.
    • 1½ cups granulated sugar - Sweetens the blondies while helping create a soft, dense texture.
    • 2 large eggs, room temperature - Provide structure and richness while keeping the blondies tender.
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - Adds warmth and depth of flavor.
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract - Gives these blondies their signature cherry-almond flavor.
    • 3 tablespoons maraschino cherry juice - Adds cherry flavor and a touch of color without adding too much moisture.
    • 1¼ cups all-purpose flour - Provides structure while allowing the blondies to remain soft and chewy.
    • ½ teaspoon salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances the flavor.
    • 1 cup chopped maraschino cherries, patted very dry - Adds bursts of sweet cherry flavor throughout every bite.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 325°F and line an 8×8-inch baking pan with parchment paper.
    • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together 1 cup melted unsalted butter and 1½ cups granulated sugar until smooth and glossy.
    Butter and sugar in mixing bowl.
    • Add 2 large eggs, one at a time, whisking well after each addition.
    Eggs added to butter and sugar in mixing bowl.
    • Stir in 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, 1 teaspoon almond extract, and 3 tablespoons maraschino cherry juice.
    Cherry juice, vanilla, extract added to mixing bowl.
    • Add 1¼ cups all-purpose flour and ½ teaspoon salt, stirring just until combined. A slightly lumpy batter is perfectly fine.
    Flour added to sugar and butter mixture in mixing bowl.
    • Gently fold in 1 cup chopped maraschino cherries that have been thoroughly patted dry.
    Cherries added to butter and sugar mixture for cherry blondies.
    • Spread the batter evenly into the prepared pan.
    • Bake for 45 to 48 minutes, until the edges are set and the center still appears slightly soft.
    • Allow the blondies to cool completely before slicing and serving.
    Baked cherry blondies in 8x8 baking pan with spatula holding one blondie.

    Tips

    • Pat the cherries very dry before adding them to the batter. This is one of the most important steps for achieving the proper texture.
    • Don’t overmix once the flour is added or the blondies can become more cake-like.
    • Allow the blondies to cool completely before cutting.
    • Slightly underbaking creates a softer, chewier texture.
    • For especially clean slices, refrigerate the blondies for 30 minutes before cutting.
    Cherry blondie on plate with fork taking a bite out of the corner.

    More Cherry Recipes

    If you love cherry recipes, you’ll also love these easy cherry desserts:

    • cherry dump cake
    • cherry bread with cherry glaze
    • no bake cherry cheesecake
    • chocolate cherry cake
    • cherry yum yum

    Recipe

    Cherry Blondies stacked on top of one another.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Cherry Blondies

    These Cherry Blondies are buttery, chewy dessert bars packed with sweet maraschino cherries and almond flavor. Easy to make and full of nostalgic cherry chip cake flavor, they're perfect for holidays, bake sales, and everyday desserts.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 16 servings
    Calories 245kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 cup unsalted butter melted
    • 1½ cups sugar
    • 2 large eggs room temperature
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 teaspoon almond extract
    • 3 tablespoons maraschino cherry juice
    • 1¼ cups all-purpose flour
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup chopped maraschino cherries patted dry really well

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 325 degrees F. Line an 8×8 pan with parchment.
    • In a bowl, whisk melted butter and sugar until glossy and smooth.
    • Add eggs one at a time, whisking well after each addition.
    • Stir in vanilla, almond extract, and cherry juice.
    • Fold in flour and salt just until combined. (the batter being a little lumpy is okay)
    • Gently fold in chopped cherries (make sure they're well dried to avoid excess moisture).
    • Spread batter into the pan.
    • Bake 45-48 minutes, until edges are set and center is slightly soft.
    • Cool completely before slicing.

    Notes

    • Pat the maraschino cherries very dry before adding them to the batter. Excess moisture can make the blondies soft or cakey instead of chewy.
    • Don’t overmix after adding the flour. Stir just until combined to keep the blondies tender.
    • Bake until the edges are set and the center still looks slightly soft. Overbaking can dry them out.
    • Let the blondies cool completely before slicing. This helps them set properly and gives you cleaner cuts.
    • For the best texture, use room-temperature eggs. They blend more evenly into the batter and help create a smoother crumb.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1blondie | Calories: 245kcal | Carbohydrates: 33g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.5g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 83mg | Potassium: 30mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 25g | Vitamin A: 391IU | Calcium: 16mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Banana Cake

    May 27, 2026

    A slice of strawberry banana cake with cream cheese frosting drizzled on top.

    Loaded with ripe bananas and juicy strawberries, this Strawberry Banana Cake bakes up soft, moist, and perfect for everything from brunch to potlucks.

    A Soft, Moist Cake That's Perfect for Spring and Summer

    If you love banana bread but want something a little lighter, softer, and more dessert-like, this strawberry banana cake is one of those recipes that instantly feels special without being complicated.

    Strawberry banana cake topped with drizzle of cream cheese frosting, sitting on wooden cutting board.

    The bananas keep the cake incredibly moist while the strawberries add fresh bursts of flavor throughout every slice. And unlike some fruit cakes that end up gummy or heavy, this one stays soft and tender with just the right balance of sweetness.

    The cream cheese frosting is what really takes it over the top. This recipe was originally tested with a traditional buttercream frosting, but the flavor just wasn't nearly as good. The slight tanginess from the cream cheese balances the sweetness perfectly and pairs beautifully with both the strawberries and bananas.

    A slice of strawberry banana cake on round plate with fork.

    This is the kind of cake that works great for gatherings like baby shower or brunch as it does for a casual summer dessert or afternoon coffee cake.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Can I use frozen strawberries?

    Yes. Use them straight from frozen and toss them in flour before adding them to the batter. Do not thaw them first or they can release too much moisture into the cake.

    Why toss strawberries in flour for a cake recipe?

    Tossing strawberries in flour helps keep them from sinking to the bottom of the cake while baking. It also helps distribute the fruit more evenly throughout the batter.

    Is this cake dense or fluffy?

    Honestly? It's somewhere in between. It has the moist texture of banana bread with a softer, more tender cake-like crumb.

    Can I make this cake ahead of time?

    Yes. The flavor is actually even better the next day after everything settles together. You can bake the cake a day ahead and frost it before serving.

    How do you store strawberry banana cake?

    Store covered at room temperature for up to 2 days or refrigerate for up to 5 days because of the cream cheese frosting.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients to make strawberry banana cake sitting on counter.

    For the Strawberry Banana Cake

    • 2¼ cups all-purpose flour, divided - Gives the cake structure while still keeping it soft and tender.
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda - Helps the cake rise and keeps the crumb light.
    • 1 teaspoon salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances the fruit flavors.
    • ½ cup unsalted butter, softened - Adds richness and moisture to the cake.
    • 1¼ cups granulated sugar - Sweetens the cake and helps create a soft texture.
    • 1½ cups very ripe bananas, mashed (about 3 large bananas) - Adds moisture, sweetness, and classic banana flavor.
    • 2 large eggs - Help bind the batter together and give structure.
    • ½ cup buttermilk - Creates a tender crumb and adds a slight tanginess.
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - Adds warmth and depth of flavor.
    • ¼ teaspoon almond extract (optional) - Gives the cake a subtle bakery-style flavor that pairs beautifully with strawberries.
    • 1½ cups sliced strawberries - Add juicy bursts of fresh strawberry flavor throughout the cake.

    For the Cream Cheese Frosting

    • 4 ounces cream cheese, softened - Creates a rich and tangy frosting base.
    • ¼ cup butter, softened - Helps make the frosting smooth and creamy.
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - Adds extra flavor and warmth.
    • Pinch of salt - Balances the sweetness.
    • 3 cups powdered sugar - Sweetens and thickens the frosting.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F and grease or line a 9-inch square baking pan with parchment paper.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together 2 cups of the flour, 1 teaspoon baking soda, and 1 teaspoon salt, reserving the remaining ¼ cup flour for the strawberries later.
    Dry ingredients in mixing bowl.
    • In a large mixing bowl, beat together ½ cup softened butter and 1¼ cups granulated sugar until combined.
    Sugar and butter in mixing bowl.
    • Add the 2 eggs, one at a time, and continue mixing until the mixture becomes lighter and fluffy.
    Eggs added in to mixing bowl with butter and sugar.
    • Mix in the 1½ cups mashed bananas, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, and ¼ teaspoon almond extract until combined.
    • Pour in the ½ cup buttermilk and mix until smooth.
    Mashed bananas and buttermilk added to cake batter in mixing bowl.
    • Add the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and stir just until combined. Do not overmix.
    Dry ingredients added to wet ingredients for banana strawberry cake.
    • Toss 1¼ cups of the sliced strawberries with the remaining ¼ cup flour, then gently fold them into the batter.
    Strawberries coated in flour mixture and added to cake batter.
    • Spread the batter evenly into the prepared baking pan and top with the remaining strawberries if desired.
    Strawberry banana cake batter in 8x8 baking dish, with strawberries on top.
    • Bake for 45-50 minutes or until the center is set and a toothpick inserted into the middle comes out clean.
    • Allow the cake to cool completely before frosting.
    Baked banana strawberry cake on wooden cutting board.

    How to Make Cream Cheese Frosting

    • To make the frosting, beat together the 4 ounces softened cream cheese, ¼ cup softened butter, 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, and a pinch of salt until smooth.
    Cream cheese frosting in mixing bowl.
    • Slowly add the 3 cups powdered sugar and continue mixing until the frosting reaches your desired consistency. If needed, add 1-2 tablespoons milk to thin slightly.
    • Spread or drizzle the frosting over the cooled cake before serving.
    Cream cheese frosting drizzled on top of strawberry banana cake.

    Tips

    • Use very ripe bananas with lots of brown spots for the best flavor and texture.
    • Don't overmix the batter or the cake can become too dense.
    • Tossing the strawberries in flour helps keep them evenly distributed throughout the cake.
    • If your strawberries are especially juicy, lightly pat them dry before adding them to the batter.
    • Check the cake a few minutes early since fruit-heavy cakes can vary slightly in bake time.
    Slice of strawberry banana cake on a wooden spatula.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love strawberry and banana flavors, you’ll also love these:

    • Strawberry Bread with Strawberry Icing
    • Strawberry Chocolate Muffins
    • Banana Dump Cake
    • Banana Pudding Dump Cake

    Recipe

    A slice of strawberry banana cake with cream cheese frosting drizzled on top.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Banana Cake

    This Strawberry Banana Cake is soft, moist, and filled with sweet bananas and juicy strawberries in every bite. Finished with cream cheese frosting, it's an easy homemade cake that's perfect for brunches, potlucks, spring gatherings, or an everyday dessert.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 9 servings
    Calories 611kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2¼ cups all-purpose flour divided
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup unsalted butter softened (1 stick)
    • 1¼ cups granulated sugar
    • 1½ cups very ripe bananas mashed (about 3 large)
    • 2 large eggs
    • ½ cup buttermilk
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon almond extract optional
    • 1½ cups strawberries sliced

    For the frosting

    • 4 oz cream cheese softened
    • ¼ cup butter softened
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • Pinch of salt
    • 3 cups powdered sugar

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F. Grease or line a 9 inch square pan with parchment paper.
    • To a medium bowl, add 2 cups of all purpose flour, baking soda, and salt (reserving ¼ cup of flour for later use), stir to combine and set aside.
    • Beat the butter and sugar together until just combined.
    • Add the eggs one at a time and cream together until nice and fluffy.
    • Add the bananas, vanilla, and almond extract. Mix until combined.
    • Then add the buttermilk and mix until combined.
    • Add the dry ingredients to the wet ingredients. Mix until combined.
    • Toss the strawberries (reserving ¼ cup for later) with the remaining ¼ cup of flour. Fold them gently into the batter.
    • Spread the batter evenly into the prepared pan.
    • Top with the remaining sliced strawberries (optional)
    • Bake at 350 degrees for 45-50 minutes, until the center is set and a toothpick comes out clean.

    How to Make Frosting

    • Combine the softened cream cheese, softened butter, pinch of salt, and 1 teaspoon of vanilla extract in a mixing bowl. Beat until combined.
    • Slowly add the powdered sugar until you get to your desired consistency. (If it gets too thick, you can thin it out with 1-2 tablespoons of milk.)
    • Cool completely before topping with frosting, then serve.

    Notes

    • Use very ripe bananas with lots of brown spots for the best flavor and moisture. Less ripe bananas can make the cake heavier and chunkier.
    • Toss the strawberries in flour before adding them to the batter so they don't sink to the bottom of the cake.
    • Do not overmix the batter once the flour is added or the cake can become dense instead of soft and tender.
    • Let the cake cool completely before frosting or the cream cheese frosting will melt.
    • Check the cake early for doneness since strawberries can add extra moisture and slightly affect bake time.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 611kcal | Carbohydrates: 101g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 22g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 91mg | Sodium: 492mg | Potassium: 215mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 72g | Vitamin A: 736IU | Vitamin C: 16mg | Calcium: 48mg | Iron: 2mg

    Strawberry Texas Sheet Cake

    May 26, 2026

    Slice of strawberry Texas sheet cake on a round plate, with a bite taken out.

    This Strawberry Texas Sheet Cake is a soft, buttery strawberry cake baked in a jelly roll pan and topped with a warm strawberry frosting that pours over the cake just like the classic chocolate Texas sheet cake version. It's easy to make, feeds a crowd, and has that nostalgic strawberry flavor everyone loves.

    An Easy Strawberry Cake That Feels Like an Old-Fashioned Favorite

    If you love desserts that feel like they came straight from a church potluck table or family reunion, this strawberry Texas sheet cake belongs on your list. The texture stays soft and tender thanks to Greek yogurt, while strawberry Jell-O and strawberry preserves give it that classic strawberry cake flavor, like in this strawberry bread with strawberry icing recipe and this 9×13 strawberry Jell-O cake.

    Slice of strawberry Texas sheet cake on plate with bite taken off.

    What makes this recipe work so well is the balance between buttery richness and bright strawberry flavor. The warm frosting melts right into the top of the cake and sets into the glossy layer Texas sheet cakes are known for.

    It's the kind of dessert that disappears fast at birthdays, summer gatherings, baby showers, holidays, and potlucks because it's simple, nostalgic, and easy to slice for a crowd. If serving a crowd, they’ll also love this strawberry whipped cream cake. Or, if you’re craving similar flavors but with a soft vanilla cake, fluffy whipped cream frosting, and fresh strawberries, then this strawberry shortcake sheet cake is a must.

    FAQs

    Does this taste like classic strawberry cake?

    Yes. The strawberry Jell-O and preserves give it that familiar old-fashioned strawberry cake flavor, but the texture is softer and more homemade than many traditional strawberry cakes.

    Why is it called a Texas sheet cake?

    Texas sheet cakes are traditionally baked in a large jelly roll pan and topped with a warm poured frosting that sets into a thin, glossy layer. This strawberry version follows the same method as the classic chocolate version.

    Can I use strawberry jam instead of preserves?

    Yes. Either one works well. Preserves may leave small pieces of strawberry throughout the cake and frosting while jam creates a smoother texture.

    Can I leave out the almond extract?

    Absolutely. The almond extract simply enhances the strawberry flavor and gives it a bakery-style taste, but the cake is still delicious without it.

    Can I use sour cream instead of Greek yogurt?

    Yes. Full-fat sour cream can be substituted in equal amounts.

    Can I make this cake ahead of time?

    Yes. In fact, the flavor gets even better once the frosting fully sets and the cake rests for several hours or overnight.

    How should I store strawberry Texas sheet cake?

    Store tightly covered at room temperature for up to 3 days.
    For longer storage, refrigerate for up to 5 days. Let slices come to room temperature before serving for the softest texture.
    You can also freeze slices for up to 2 months if tightly wrapped.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    For the Cake

    • 2 cups all purpose flour - Provides the structure for the cake while still keeping the crumb soft and tender.
    • 2 cups granulated sugar - Sweetens the cake while helping create a moist, soft texture.
    • ½ teaspoon salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances the strawberry flavor.
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda - Helps the cake rise and reacts with the Greek yogurt for a tender crumb.
    • 3 tablespoons strawberry Jell-O powder - Adds concentrated strawberry flavor and the classic pink color.
    • 1 cup unsalted butter - Gives the cake richness and buttery flavor.
    • 1 cup water - Helps create the thin batter traditional Texas sheet cakes are known for.
    • ½ cup Greek yogurt - Adds moisture, softness, and slight tang while keeping the cake tender.
    • 2 eggs, room temperature - Provide structure, richness, and stability to the batter.
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - Enhances and rounds out the strawberry flavor.
    • ¼ teaspoon almond extract - Gives the cake that nostalgic bakery-style strawberry flavor pairing.
    • 2 tablespoons strawberry preserves or jam - Adds concentrated strawberry flavor without adding excess moisture.

    For the Frosting

    • ½ cup unsalted butter - Creates the rich base for the frosting and helps it set into the classic Texas sheet cake texture.
    • ¼ cup milk - Helps create a smooth, pourable frosting consistency.
    • ¼ cup strawberry preserves or jam - Adds extra strawberry flavor and a glossy finish.
    • 3 tablespoons strawberry Jell-O powder - Intensifies the strawberry flavor and color.
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract - Balances and enhances the sweetness.
    • 3½ cups powdered sugar - Sweetens and thickens the frosting into a smooth icing that sets beautifully over the cake.
    Ingredients to make strawberry Texas sheet cake on counter.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees Fahrenheit and grease a 13×18-inch jelly roll pan.
    • In a large mixing bowl, whisk together the 2 cups all-purpose flour, 2 cups granulated sugar, ½ teaspoon salt, 1 teaspoon baking soda, and 3 tablespoons strawberry Jell-O powder.
    Dry ingredients, including strawberry jello mix, in mixing bowl.
    • In a medium saucepan over medium heat, combine 1 cup unsalted butter and 1 cup water. Heat until the butter melts and the mixture begins to simmer.
    Butter in sauce pan.
    • Pour the hot butter mixture into the dry ingredients and whisk until smooth.
    Melted butter poured on top of jello and dry ingredients mixture.
    • Stir in the ½ cup Greek yogurt. Add the 2 eggs one at a time, stirring between each addition.
    Greek yogurt added to cake batter in mixing bowl.
    • Stir in the 1 teaspoon vanilla extract, ¼ teaspoon almond extract, and 2 tablespoons strawberry preserves until fully combined.
    Vanilla and almond extracts added to cake batter in mixing bowl.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and spread evenly.
    Strawberry Texas sheet cake batter poured in to sheet pan.
    • Bake for 18 to 22 minutes or until the center springs back lightly and a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    Baked strawberry Texas sheet cake.

    How to Make Strawberry Icing

    • While the cake finishes baking, prepare the frosting.
    • In a medium saucepan over medium heat, combine the ½ cup unsalted butter, ¼ cup milk, and ¼ cup strawberry preserves.
    • Heat until the butter melts and the mixture becomes smooth and lightly steamy.
    • Whisk in the 3 tablespoons strawberry Jell-O powder and ½ teaspoon vanilla extract until dissolved.
    Strawberry frosting ingredients in saucepan.
    • Remove from heat and gradually whisk in the 3½ cups powdered sugar until smooth and pourable.
    Powdered sugar added to saucepan for strawberry Texas sheet cake frosting.
    • Immediately pour the warm frosting over the warm cake and gently spread evenly with an offset spatula.
    • Allow the frosting to fully set before slicing and serving, about 90 minutes.
    Strawberry icing on top of strawberry Texas sheet cake.

    Tips

    • Use room temperature eggs for a smoother batter and more even baking.
    • Do not overbake the cake or it may lose the soft Texas sheet cake texture.
    • Pour the frosting over the cake while both are still warm so it spreads properly.
    • Almond extract gives the cake a classic bakery-style strawberry flavor, but it can be omitted if preferred.
    • If the frosting thickens too quickly, whisk in a small splash of milk before pouring.
    • Strawberry preserves create a stronger strawberry flavor than fresh berries in this recipe.
    A slice of strawberry Texas sheet cake on a wooden spatula, above the rest of the cake.

    More Recipes

    If you love strawberry recipes like this one, then you’ll also love these strawberry desserts:

    • strawberry heaven
    • strawberry brownies
    • strawberry cream cheese dump cake
    • strawberry crunch cake

    Recipe

    Slice of strawberry Texas sheet cake on a round plate, with a bite taken out.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Texas Sheet Cake

    This Strawberry Texas Sheet Cake is one of those easy desserts that works for almost any gathering. The thin, soft cake paired with the glossy strawberry frosting makes it feel nostalgic, comforting, and easy to serve for birthdays, potlucks, holidays, and summer parties.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 18 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 1 hour hour 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 2 hours hours 8 minutes minutes
    Servings 20 slices
    Calories 364kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    For the cake:

    • 2 cups all purpose flour
    • 2 cups granulated sugar
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • 3 tablespoons strawberry Jell-O powder
    • 1 cup unsalted butter
    • 1 cup water
    • ½ cup Greek yogurt
    • 2 eggs room temperature
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon almond extract
    • 2 tablespoons strawberry preserves or jam

    For the frosting:

    • ½ cup unsalted butter
    • ¼ cup milk
    • ¼ cup strawberry preserves or jam
    • 3 tablespoons Jell-O powder
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 3 ½ cups powdered sugar

    Instructions

    • Set the oven temperature to 350 degrees Fahrenheit. Grease a 13×18 jelly roll pan. Set aside.
    • In a large bowl combine the all purpose flour, granulated sugar, salt, baking soda, and strawberry Jell-O powder. Set aside.
    • In a medium saucepan add the unsalted butter and water. Set over medium heat and heat until the butter melts and the mixture begins to simmer.
    • Pour the hot butter mixture into the dry ingredients and whisk until smooth.
    • Add the Greek yogurt, stir to combine. Then add the eggs one at a time, stirring between each addition. Then add the vanilla extract, almond extract, and strawberry preserves. Stir until well combined.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared jelly roll pan and spread the batter out evenly.
    • Bake for 18-22 minutes or until the center springs back lightly and a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    • Do not overbake the cake or it may lose the soft Texas sheet cake texture.

    Strawberry Frosting

    • Prepare the frosting during the last few minutes of baking.
    • In a medium saucepan placed over medium heat combine the unsalted butter, milk, and strawberry preserves.
    • Heat until the butter has melted and the mixture is smooth and lightly steamy.
    • Whisk in the strawberry Jell-O and vanilla extract until dissolved.
    • Remove from heat and gradually whisk in the powdered sugar until smooth and pourable.
    • You can add a bit of milk if the frosting thickens too much.
    • Immediately pour the frosting over the warm cake.
    • Gently spread the frosting with an offset spatula so it's evenly distributed on the cake.
    • Allow the frosting to set fully before slicing and serving. (about 90 minutes)

    Notes

    Recipe Tips

    • Use room temperature eggs for a smoother batter and more even texture.
    • Pour the frosting over the cake while both the cake and frosting are still warm so the icing spreads easily and sets properly.
    • For the softest texture, allow the frosting to fully set before slicing.
    • Powdered sugar should be spooned into the measuring cup instead of packed for the smoothest frosting consistency.
    • This cake tastes even better the next day after the flavors have had time to develop.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 364kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 137mg | Potassium: 41mg | Fiber: 0.4g | Sugar: 46g | Vitamin A: 455IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 20mg | Iron: 1mg

    Church Supper Recipes

    May 16, 2026

    Church supper recipes collage.

    Church supper recipes are the kinds of meals that show up on long folding tables beside casseroles, slow cookers, sheet cakes, and baskets of rolls.

    These are dependable, crowd-friendly recipes made with simple ingredients that are easy to serve, easy to share, and comforting enough to bring people back for seconds.

    Church supper recipes in a collage.

    The Kind of Recipes That Always Show Up First

    Church supper recipes became favorites for a reason. They're practical, filling, affordable, and made to feed a group without making cooking feel complicated. Casseroles, creamy chicken dishes, slow-cooked meats, potluck sides, and hearty desserts became staples because they worked well for gatherings and could be counted on to turn out every time.

    Even now, these recipes still show up at church suppers, family reunions, holiday gatherings, school events, and neighborhood potlucks because they're familiar, comforting, and easy to make for a crowd.

    Many of these recipes are inspired by handwritten recipe cards, community cookbooks, fellowship hall dinners, and the kinds of meals families have shared around tables for generations. They're simple, nostalgic, and exactly the kind of recipes people still look for when they need something dependable to bring and share.

    What Makes a Good Church Supper Recipe?

    The best church supper recipes usually have a few things in common:

    • Simple, affordable ingredients
    • Easy preparation
    • Recipes that feed a crowd
    • Familiar flavors people recognize
    • Dishes that travel and serve easily
    • Comfort food recipes that work for gatherings and potlucks

    These are the kinds of recipes that fit just as well at a weeknight family dinner as they do on a crowded potluck table.

    Crowd-Favorite Main Dishes

    These hearty main dishes are the kinds of recipes people pile onto their plates first at church suppers, potlucks, and family gatherings.

    Dutch Oven Pot Roast

    Tender beef cooked low and slow with vegetables until rich, hearty, and fall-apart tender.

    Chuck roast in dutch oven, with potatoes and carrots.
    Pot Roast Recipe

    Dutch Oven Beef Stew

    Rich, cozy, and packed with tender beef and vegetables, this is the kind of meal that tastes even better the next day.

    Southern Fried Chicken

    A comfort food classic that fits right in at church suppers and family gatherings.

    Old-Fashioned Tuna Casserole

    Creamy, hearty, and made with simple pantry staples, this old-fashioned tuna casserole is a dependable comfort food favorite for gatherings and family dinners alike.

    Spoon rested in baking dish where tuna casserole was baked.

    Cozy Chicken Dinners

    These comforting chicken recipes are warm, creamy, filling, and perfect for feeding a family.

    Chicken and Dumplings

    A classic comfort food recipe with tender chicken and soft dumplings in a creamy broth.

    Chicken and Noodles

    One of the easiest old-fashioned comfort dinners made with simple ingredients and cozy flavors.

    Chicken Pot Pie Casserole

    Everything people love about classic chicken pot pie in an easy casserole form.

    Chicken Rice Casserole

    This creamy casserole is easy to make for gatherings, potlucks, or busy weeknight dinners.

    Old fashioned chicken and rice casserole being scooped out of baking dish.

    Chicken Stuffing Bake

    The Stove Top Stuffing makes this delicious and hearty casserole so easy and so flavorful.

    Chicken and Gravy

    An easy comfort food dinner that works well for feeding a crowd.

    Hearty Beef Favorites

    Rich gravies, tender beef, and cozy flavors make these classic dinners feel timeless.

    Salisbury Steak

    Seasoned beef patties covered in rich brown gravy for a comforting old-fashioned dinner.

    Salisbury steak in skillet, covered in gravy.

    Slow Cooker Cube Steak

    Tender cube steak cooked low and slow in gravy until fork-tender.

    Slow Cooker Goulash

    A hearty, comforting pasta and beef dinner that's simple, filling, and crowd-friendly.

    Beef Stroganoff

    Creamy noodles and savory beef combine for one of the coziest comfort food dinners.

    ground beef stroganoff in black skillet
    Stovetop Beef Stroganoff

    Hamburger Mac and Cheese

    Creamy, cheesy, and hearty enough to feed a crowd, this hamburger mac and cheese is the kind of simple comfort food that fits right in at church suppers and family gatherings.

    Potluck Favorites

    These simple meals prove comfort food doesn't have to be expensive to be satisfying.

    Maid Rite Sandwiches

    Loose meat sandwiches with simple seasoning that feel straight out of an old diner menu.

    Close up of maid rite sandwich sitting on white plate.

    Ham and Beans

    A hearty, cozy dinner made with simple ingredients and classic flavor.

    Beanie Weenies

    An old-fashioned comfort food favorite that's simple, nostalgic, and surprisingly satisfying.

    Hamburger Hashbrown Casserole

    Creamy, cheesy, and hearty enough for a busy weeknight dinner.

    Ladle holding hamburger hashbrown casserole above the baking dish.

    Stove Top Stuffing Meatloaf

    A shortcut comfort food dinner that still delivers classic meatloaf flavor and texture.

    Salmon Patties

    Crispy on the outside and tender inside, these old-fashioned salmon patties are made with canned salmon and simple ingredients for an easy, budget-friendly dinner.

    More Church Supper Recipes Coming Soon

    This collection will continue growing with more classic comfort food recipes like:

    • Swiss Steak
    • Beef Tips and Gravy
    • Creamed Chicken and Biscuits

    If you love nostalgic comfort food recipes made with simple ingredients, be sure to bookmark this page and check back often for new additions.

    More Comfort Food Recipes You May Love

    If you love nostalgic comfort food, potluck recipes, and old-fashioned favorites, these collections are worth browsing too:

    • Old-Fashioned Cake Recipes
    • Potluck Desserts
    • Old-Fashioned Recipes

    Cherry Bread with Cherry Glaze

    May 12, 2026

    Cherry bread with cherry icing on wooden cutting board.

    This cherry bread recipe is soft, moist, and full of sweet maraschino cherries with a simple cherry glaze on top. If you love old-fashioned cherry desserts with that classic cherry-almond flavor, this is one of those recipes you'll want to make again and again.

    The Kind of Sweet Bread That Disappears Fast

    People usually think of cherry bread as just another sweet loaf recipe until they cut that first slice. Then, somehow, everyone keeps walking back through the kitchen for "just one more piece" before it's even fully cooled.

    Cherry bread with cherry icing on wooden cutting board.

    The almond extract paired with the cherries gives it that old-fashioned bakery flavor that tastes nostalgic in the best way.. Honestly, don't skip the almond extract. It's what makes this taste like a true cherry dessert instead of just a basic sweet bread. I also paired almond extract with maraschino cherries in these cherry blondies and this cherry sheet cake, as I adore this combination of flavors.

    This recipe was tested with both finely chopped cherries and bigger chunks, and the bigger pieces definitely won in our house because you get more bites of cherry throughout the bread. The glaze on top also adds just enough sweetness without making the loaf overly rich.

    This is perfect for brunches, baby showers, holidays, or honestly just with coffee in the afternoon.

    Sliced cherry bread on table.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    Can cherry bread be frozen?

    Yes. I actually recommend freezing it without the glaze if possible, then adding the glaze after thawing for the best texture and appearance.
    Wrap the loaf tightly and freeze for up to 2 months.

    Do I have to use maraschino cherries?

    For this recipe, yes, I really recommend them.
    The cherry juice is part of what flavors both the bread and glaze, so using fresh cherries will change both the flavor and sweetness quite a bit.

    Why use both Greek yogurt and buttermilk?

    The combination gives this bread a really soft texture without making it heavy.
    The yogurt adds richness while the buttermilk helps keep the crumb tender.

    Why did my cherry bread turn out dense?

    Usually, this happens from overmixing the batter or adding too much flour.
    Once the dry ingredients are added, stir just until combined. The batter doesn't need to be perfectly smooth.

    Does almond extract really matter in Cherry Bread?

    Yes. This is one of those recipes where a small amount completely changes the flavor.
    It gives the bread that classic cherry bakery taste people recognize immediately.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Key Ingredient Notes

    • Greek yogurt: Helps keep the bread soft and moist without making it heavy.
    • Buttermilk: Gives the loaf a tender texture and works with the baking soda for rise.
    • Almond extract: The ingredient that gives this bread that classic cherry bakery flavor.
    • Cherry juice: Don't throw it away. It flavors both the bread and glaze.
    • Oil instead of butter: Using oil instead of butter also helps keep the loaf softer for longer, which makes this a great make-ahead recipe.
    Ingredients to make cherry bread, sitting on counter.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees and grease or line a 9×5-inch loaf pan.
    • Drain the cherries, reserving the juice, and chop the cherries.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt.
    Dry ingredients for cherry bread in mixing bowl.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the sugar and oil until smooth.
    • Add the eggs one at a time, mixing between each addition.
    Egg added in to sugar and oil in mixing bowl for cherry bread recipe.
    • Stir in the Greek yogurt, buttermilk, vanilla extract, almond extract, and cherry juice.
    Greek yogurt, buttermilk, vanilla and almond extract added to sugar and oil mixture.
    • Add the dry ingredients into the wet ingredients and stir just until combined.
    Dry ingredients added to cherry juice and sugar mixture.
    • Fold in the chopped cherries.
    Chopped cherries added to cherry bread batter.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared loaf pan and smooth the top.
    • Bake until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    Baked cherry bread in loaf pan.
    • Let the bread cool for about 10 minutes before removing from the pan.
    • Whisk together the powdered sugar, remaining cherry juice, and a splash of extract to make the glaze.
    Cherry juice glaze in mixing bowl.
    • Drizzle over the cooled bread and serve.
    Cherry icing drizzled over the top of cherry bread.

    Tips

    • Don't overmix the batter or the bread can become dense.
    • Coarsely chopped cherries give better bites of cherry throughout the loaf.
    • If the top starts browning too quickly, loosely tent with foil near the end of baking.
    • Let the loaf cool before glazing or the glaze can melt right off.
    A slice of cherry bread resting on a plate, next to a fork.

    Related Recipes

    If you love easy bread recipes like this one, you’ll also love this strawberry bread recipe, this pineapple bread, and this banana bread recipe.

    Recipe

    Cherry bread with cherry icing on wooden cutting board.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Cherry Bread Recipe

    This cherry bread is soft, moist, and packed with sweet maraschino cherries and classic cherry-almond flavor. Finished with a simple cherry glaze, it's an easy quick bread recipe perfect for brunches, holidays, or afternoon coffee.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 354kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 10 ounce jar of maraschino cherries without stems, chopped, and juice reserved
    • 1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar
    • ½ cup neutral oil vegetable or avocado oil
    • 2 large eggs room temperature
    • ¾ cup Greek yogurt
    • ¼ cup buttermilk
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon almond extract
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • Splash of vanilla or almond extract

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Line or grease a 9 x 5-inch loaf pan. Set aside.
    • Drain and chop cherries, reserving the juice for the bread and the glaze.
    • In a bowl, whisk the flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt together. Set aside.
    • In a large bowl, whisk the sugar and oil until smooth.
    • Add the eggs one at a time, mixing between each addition. Then mix in the Greek yogurt.
    • Next add the buttermilk, vanilla extract, and almond extract. Mix until combined.
    • Add 3 tablespoons of the reserved cherry juice to the batter (reserve the remaining for the glaze). Stir until combined.
    • Add dry ingredients to wet and stir just until combined. Do not overmix.
    • Gently fold in chopped cherries.
    • Smooth the top after pouring it into the prepared pan. A toothpick should come out clean after 50 to 55 minutes of baking.
    • Let the pan cool for ten minutes, then transfer to a wire rack.
    • In a small mixing bowl, combine the remaining 2 tablespoons of cherry juice, powdered sugar and a splash of vanilla extract (or almond). Stir to combine.
    • Drizzle over the top and enjoy.

    Notes

    • Don't skip the almond extract. It gives the bread that classic cherry bakery flavor.
    • Stir the batter just until combined to keep the bread soft and tender.
    • Coarsely chopped cherries give better bites of cherry throughout the loaf.
    • If the top starts browning too quickly, loosely tent with foil during the last 10-15 minutes of baking.
    • Let the bread cool before glazing or the glaze can melt right off.
    • For best results, use full-fat Greek yogurt for a richer texture.
    • Oil helps keep this bread softer longer than butter-based quick breads.
    • Freeze without the glaze for the best texture after thawing.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 354kcal | Carbohydrates: 57g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 12g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 240mg | Potassium: 72mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 39g | Vitamin A: 71IU | Calcium: 71mg | Iron: 1mg

    Old-Fashioned Desserts Everyone Knows and Loves

    May 8, 2026

    A collage of old-fashioned dessert recipes

    Old-fashioned desserts are the kind of recipes that never really go out of style. They're simple, comforting, and almost always tied to a memory, church potlucks, family dinners, or handwritten recipe cards passed down over time.

    These are the desserts everyone recognizes. The ones that show up again and again because they work. No complicated steps, no trendy ingredients, just reliable, crowd-pleasing favorites that people actually want to eat.

    Old-Fashioned Dessert Recipes collage.

    The Kind of Desserts People Always Come Back For

    Old-fashioned recipes, usually aren’t fancy, but they're memorable, and they’re the recipes written on stained recipe cards. The recipes that someone's grandma always brought to holidays.

    And honestly? Those are usually the best recipes anyway.

    Whether you're baking for a potluck, family dinner, holiday gathering, or just because you're craving something comforting, these classic desserts still deserve a place at the table.

    Frequently Asked Questions About Old-Fashioned Desserts

    What are old-fashioned desserts?

    Old-fashioned desserts are classic recipes that have been passed down through generations. They're typically made with simple pantry ingredients and are known for being easy, reliable, and perfect for sharing at gatherings like potlucks or family dinners.

    What desserts were popular in the 1950s and 1960s?

    Many desserts from the 1950s and 1960s are still popular today, especially at potlucks and holidays. Some of the most well-known include dump cakes, bread pudding, pineapple desserts, Jello-based layered desserts, and simple sheet cakes.

    What is the most popular old-fashioned dessert?

    Some of the most popular old-fashioned desserts include bread pudding, cherry dump cake, peach cobbler, lemon lush desserts, and classic 9×13 cakes.

    Why are old-fashioned desserts still popular?

    Old-fashioned desserts are still popular because they're simple and dependable. They don't rely on complicated techniques or hard-to-find ingredients, and they consistently turn out well.

    What is a good old-fashioned dessert for a potluck?

    The best old-fashioned desserts for a potluck are ones that are easy to transport and serve, such as dump cakes, 9×13 sheet cakes, cobblers, and no-bake layered desserts.

    Old-Fashioned Cake Recipes

    Old-fashioned cake recipes are the kinds of desserts that feel like they came straight from a church basement table. They're simple, dependable, and always a good choice when you need a dessert people instantly recognize.

    • Westhaven Cake
    • Shoofly Cake
    • Hummingbird Sheet Cake
    • Strawberry Jello Cake
    Hummingbird cake topped with frosting in 9x13 baking dish.
    Hummingbird Cake

    Cozy Everyday Bakes

    Not every old-fashioned dessert was made for a giant potluck table. Some of the best vintage recipes are the simple everyday bakes people made for family dinners, weekend guests, or an afternoon cup of coffee.

    These comforting desserts feel homey, familiar, and easy to make without a lot of fuss. They're the kinds of recipes that make the kitchen smell incredible and somehow feel special even on an ordinary day.

    • Bread Pudding – Warm, soft, and rich with comforting flavor, bread pudding is one of those timeless desserts that never really disappears. It's simple, nostalgic, and especially good served warm with vanilla sauce.
    • Cinnamon Coffee Cake – Classic cinnamon coffee cake is the kind of recipe that belongs beside a hot cup of coffee and a slow morning. With its buttery crumb and cinnamon flavor, it feels like something straight from an old handwritten recipe card.
    • Supper Cake – Simple cakes like supper cake are part of what makes old-fashioned desserts so comforting. Baked in a round pan and meant for casual gatherings or weeknight desserts, this kind of cake feels cozy, practical, and deeply nostalgic in the best way.
    Bread pudding in 8x8 baking dish.
    Bread Pudding

    Classic 9×13 Potluck Desserts

    If there's one thing that defines old-fashioned desserts, it's the classic 9×13 pan. They show up in glass baking dishes, get carried into potlucks with foil over the top, and disappear before dinner is even over.

    • Chocolate Depression Cake – made with vinegar instead of eggs, to create a delicious, moist cake, with chocolate frosting.
    • Dump Cake Recipes – easy, buttery desserts with fruit fillings and cake mix toppings that have become potluck staples for generations.
    • Lemon Lush Dessert – a creamy layered dessert with bright lemon flavor that's been a favorite at potlucks and family gatherings for decades.

    Favorite Dump Cake Recipes

    If there's one category that truly defines old-fashioned, practical desserts, it's dump cakes. These are the recipes people rely on when they need something fast, but still homemade and comforting.

    They're simple, layered desserts with buttery toppings and sweet fruit fillings that come together with very little effort.

    • Cherry Dump Cake
    • Blueberry Dump Cake
    • Pineapple Dump Cake
    • Pecan Dump Cake Recipe
    Cherry dump cake in a small bowl.
    Cherry Dump Cake

    No-Bake & Chilled Classics

    Old-fashioned doesn't always mean baked. Some of the most loved desserts come straight from the fridge.

    These chilled desserts are especially popular in the warmer months and are often layered, creamy, and easy to make ahead.

    • Peanut Butter Pie
    • Oreo Dessert
    • Strawberry Icebox Cake

    See more of my favorite no-bake dessert recipes.

    No Bake Oreo Pudding Dessert on a plate
    No Bake Oreo Dessert

    Dessert Sauces That Make Everything Better

    Sometimes it's the simple extras that make old-fashioned desserts feel even more special. These simple homemade sauces are the kinds of recipes that get passed down quietly but used for years. They turn simple desserts into something that feels extra comforting and nostalgic.

    • Hot Fudge Sauce
    • Vanilla Sauce
    Hot fudge being dripped from spoon back in to bowl.
    Hot Fudge Sauce

    Tips for Making Old-Fashioned Desserts Turn Out Right

    • Use simple ingredients – these recipes are designed for basics
    • Don't overthink it – most of these are meant to be easy and forgiving
    • Let desserts rest when needed, especially bread pudding and dump cakes

    Why Old-Fashioned Desserts Still Work

    Old-fashioned desserts aren't about being fancy. They're about being reliable.

    They're made with ingredients people already have. They're easy enough for busy days. And they're the kind of recipes people actually come back for seconds.

    That's why they've lasted, and why they still belong on your table today.

    More Desserts You'll Love

    If you love these kinds of recipes, you'll also want to check out my Easy Potluck Desserts that are great for so many occasions.

    Image collage of potluck desserts.

    Blueberry Dump Cake (Easy, Buttery Dessert with Fresh Berries)

    April 30, 2026

    Blueberry dump cake, with serving spoon resting in pan.

    Blueberry dump cake is one of those old-fashioned desserts that feels simple but a little more elevated at the same time. It has that classic buttery topping you expect, but the juicy blueberries and hint of cinnamon give it a richer, slightly more homemade flavor.

    It's still just as easy as any dump cake, but the added fresh berries and warm flavor make it perfect when you want something a little more than the basics.

    The Kind of Dessert That Feels Just a Little Extra Special

    A serving of blueberry dump cake topped with vanilla ice cream, on a plate.

    FAQs

    What is blueberry dump cake?

    Blueberry dump cake is an easy dessert made by layering blueberry filling, cake mix, and butter, then baking until golden and bubbly. This version adds fresh blueberries and a little flavor boost for extra texture.

    Can I use frozen blueberries instead of fresh?

    Yes, you can use frozen blueberries. No need to thaw them first-just add them straight in.

    Why is my dump cake powdery on top?

    This usually means the butter didn't fully cover the cake mix. Use the tilt method (see tips below) or add a little more melted butter to dry spots.

    How do you store blueberry dump cake?

    Store leftovers covered in the refrigerator for 3-4 days. Reheat before serving for best texture.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    • Blueberry pie filling - The base of the recipe, giving it a rich, sweet blueberry flavor.
    • Fresh blueberries - Add extra texture and a more natural berry flavor.
    • Yellow cake mix - Creates the buttery, crumbly topping.
    • Butter - Helps the topping bake evenly and adds richness.
    • Cinnamon - Adds a subtle warmth that pairs really well with blueberries.
    • Vanilla extract - Enhances the flavor and gives it a more homemade taste.
    Blueberry dump cake ingredients sitting on kitchen counter.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven and lightly grease a baking dish.
    • Spread the blueberry pie filling evenly across the bottom of the dish.
    • Stir in the vanilla extract and cinnamon directly into the filling.
    Canned blueberry pie filling spread in bottom of 9x13 baking dish.
    • Sprinkle the fresh blueberries evenly over the top.
    Fresh blueberries sprinkled on top of blueberry pie filling.
    • Add the dry cake mix evenly across the surface. Do not stir.
    Cake mix sprinkled on top of blueberry pie filling in 9x13 baking dish.
    • Place thin slices of butter over the cake mix, covering as much of the surface as possible.
    Slices of butter on top of cake mix for blueberry dump cake.
    • Bake until the top is golden and the blueberry filling is bubbling around the edges.
    Baked blueberry dump cake in 9x13 baking dish.
    • Let cool slightly before serving warm.

    Tips

    • Use the tilt method for even butter coverage. You can lightly smooth peaks with a fork to help the butter settle evenly.
    • Don't skip the fresh blueberries. They add texture and make the dessert feel less like a shortcut recipe and more like something made from scratch.
    • Cold butter works well here. Thin slices help create a more crumbly, cobbler-like topping. You can also melt the butter and pour it on like I do in most of my dump cake recipes. (This is just a preference on what you find easier.)
    • Watch for bubbling edges. That's the best sign the filling is fully cooked.
    • Let it rest before serving. About 15 minutes helps everything set so it's easier to scoop.

    Why Blueberry Works So Well

    Blueberries have a slightly tart flavor that balances really well with the sweet cake topping. When baked, they soften and release juices that blend with the filling, creating a richer, more layered flavor than some other dump cake variations.

    Adding fresh berries on top of the filling also gives you little pockets of texture, which is what makes this version stand out.

    Blueberry dump cake topped with a scoop of vanilla ice cream.

    Related Recipes

    If you love easy desserts like this, you may also enjoy:

    • Cherry Dump Cake - A classic version with a sweet and slightly tart cherry filling.
    • Chocolate Cherry Dump Cake - A richer twist with chocolate and cherry combined.
    • Strawberry Cheesecake Dump Cake - Creamy and fruity with a cheesecake-style layer.
    • Caramel Apple Dump Cake - A cozy, fall-inspired dessert with warm caramel flavor.
    • Pumpkin Dump Cake - Soft, spiced, and perfect for cooler weather.

    Recipe

    Blueberry dump cake, with serving spoon resting in pan.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Blueberry Dump Cake

    This blueberry dump cake is a buttery, easy dessert made with pie filling and fresh blueberries, creating a rich, slightly tart flavor with a golden, crumbly topping.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 servings
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 42 ounces canned blueberry pie filling 21 ounces each
    • 1 box yellow cake mix
    • ½ cup unsalted butter 1 stick – 8 tablespoons, cold
    • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ½ cup fresh blueberries

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 350°F (175°C). Lightly grease a 9×13-inch baking dish with nonstick spray or butter and set it aside for later use.
    • Spread blueberry pie filling evenly in the bottom of the baking dish. Use a spatula to spread it evenly across the bottom.
    • Stir in vanilla extract and cinnamon directly into the filling until well combined.
    • Evenly sprinkle the fresh blueberries over the filling.
    • Sprinkle the dry cake mix evenly over the top of the blueberry filling. Do not mix; this is what creates the dump cake texture.
    • Cut the cold butter into thin slices or small pats and place them evenly over the cake mix. Try to cover as much surface area as possible so the topping bakes evenly.
    • Bake for 45-50 minutes, or until the top is golden and the filling is bubbling around the edges.
    • Let the cake sit for 15-20 minutes after removing from the oven. This allows the filling to thicken slightly, making serving easier.

    Cherry Dump Cake (Easy 3-Ingredient Dessert)

    April 27, 2026

    Cherry dump cake topped with homemade whipped cream, served in a dessert bowl.

    This cherry dump cake is one of those easy old-fashioned desserts that never goes out of style. With just a few simple ingredients, it bakes into a warm, buttery cake with a sweet and slightly tart cherry filling that's hard to resist. If you love classic cherry desserts, this is one of the easiest ways to make one at home.

    Cherry dump cake is one of the most popular dump cake variations because of its sweet and slightly tart flavor and simple ingredients. It's a simple dessert that delivers big flavor without a lot of effort, which is exactly why it's been a favorite for so long.

    Cherry dump cake, topped with whipped cream, in a vintage bowl.

    A Classic Dessert That's Sweet, Simple, and Always a Favorite

    This cherry dump cake is the kind of recipe that works for just about anything, as a potluck dessert recipe, holidays, or those nights when you need something quick but still homemade.

    If you want to see how this method works with different fruit options, check out this easy dump cake recipe that uses the same simple approach.

    Or, if you're looking for more ideas, you can see all of my dump cake recipes.

    Baked cherry dump cake in a 9x13 baking dish.

    FAQs

    What is cherry dump cake?

    Cherry dump cake is a simple dessert made by layering cherry pie filling, dry cake mix, and butter, then baking until golden and bubbly. There's no mixing required.

    Can I use fresh cherries instead of pie filling?

    You can, but pie filling works best for ease and consistency. If using fresh cherries, you'll need to add sugar and a thickener.

    Can you make cherry dump cake ahead of time?

    Yes, it can be made ahead and reheated. It's best served warm.

    How do you store cherry dump cake?

    Store leftovers covered in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. Reheat before serving.

    Why Cherry Works So Well

    Cherry is one of the most popular choices for dump cake because it has the perfect balance of sweet and tart. It pairs especially well with the buttery cake topping and creates that classic flavor people expect from this dessert.

    If you're new to dump cakes, this is a great version to start with before trying other variations.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    • Cherry pie filling - The base of this recipe, giving it that classic sweet and slightly tart cherry flavor.
    • Yellow cake mix - Creates the buttery, crumbly topping.
    • Butter - Helps the topping bake evenly and adds richness.
    Yellow cake mix, cherry pie filling, and butter on the counter.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven and lightly grease a baking dish.
    • Pour the cherry pie filling into the dish and spread it evenly across the bottom.
    Cherry pie filling poured in 9x13 baking dish.
    • Sprinkle the dry cake mix evenly over the cherries, making sure to cover the entire surface. Do not stir.
    Yellow cake mix sprinkled on top of cherry pie filling.
    • Drizzle the butter on top, evenly over the cake mix.
    Melted butter poured on top of cake mix in baking pan.
    • Bake until the topping is golden and the cherry filling is bubbling around the edges. Let cool slightly before serving warm.
    Cherry dump cake served in small serving bowl, sitting next to 9x13 baking dish.

    Tips

    • Use the tilt method for even butter coverage. After pouring melted butter, gently tilt the pan so it spreads across the surface. If you see dry spots or mounds of cake mix, lightly smooth them with a fork, then tilt again so the butter settles into those areas.
    • Don't stir the layers. This is what gives dump cake its signature texture with a soft fruit base and buttery topping.
    • Melted butter works best. It helps cover the cake mix more evenly and prevents dry patches.
    • Watch for bubbling edges. The fruit should be bubbling around the edges when it's done.
    • Let it rest before serving. About 10-15 minutes helps it set and makes it easier to scoop.
    A serving of cherry dump cake in a bowl, with whipped cream spooned on top.

    Notes

    • Do not stir the layers.
    • Use the tilt method to prevent dry spots.
    • Bake until the filling is bubbling for best results.
    • Let rest before serving for easier scooping.
    A bite-size of dump cake being held by spoon, above bowl.

    Related Recipes

    If you love easy desserts like this, you may also enjoy:

    • Chocolate Cherry Dump Cake – A rich, chocolatey twist with sweet cherry filling that turns this simple dessert into something a little more indulgent.
    • Strawberry Cheesecake Dump Cake – Creamy and fruity, this version adds a cheesecake layer that makes it feel extra special without much extra effort.
    • Caramel Apple Dump Cake – A cozy favorite with tender apples and a warm caramel flavor that's perfect for fall or holiday gatherings.
    • Pecan Pie Dump Cake – A buttery, nutty dessert inspired by classic pecan pie, with a soft center and a slightly crisp topping.
    • Chocolate Peanut Butter Dump Cake – A decadent combination of chocolate and peanut butter that's perfect when you're craving something rich and satisfying.
    • Pumpkin Dump Cake – Full of warm spices and pumpkin flavor, this one has all the comfort of pumpkin pie with an easy cake-style topping.
    • Banana Dump Cake – A great way to use ripe bananas, with a soft, cake-like texture and a flavor similar to banana bread.
    • Oreo Dump Cake – A fun, cookies-and-cream-inspired dessert that's rich, chocolatey, and especially popular with kids.

    Recipe

    Cherry dump cake topped with homemade whipped cream, served in a dessert bowl.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Cherry Dump Cake

    This easy cherry dump cake is a classic 3-ingredient dessert made with cherry pie filling, cake mix, and butter for a warm, buttery, crowd-pleasing treat.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 490kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 – 21-ounce cans cherry pie filling
    • 1 cup unsalted butter melted
    • 15.25 ounce box yellow cake mix

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven and lightly grease a baking dish.
    • Pour the cherry pie filling into the dish and spread it evenly across the bottom.
    • Sprinkle the dry cake mix evenly over the cherries, making sure to cover the entire surface. Do not stir.
    • Pour the melted butter on top, drizzling melted butter evenly over the cake mix. See tips in the notes below, to make sure all cake mix gets covered.
    • Bake until the topping is golden and the cherry filling is bubbling around the edges.
    • Let cool slightly before serving warm.

    Video

    Notes

    • More cherry flavor. If you love a stronger cherry flavor, you can add a little extra pie filling before baking.
    • Use the tilt method for even butter coverage. After pouring melted butter, gently tilt the pan so it spreads across the surface. If you see dry spots or mounds of cake mix, lightly smooth them with a fork, then tilt again so the butter settles into those areas.
    • Don't stir the layers. This is what gives dump cake its signature texture with a soft fruit base and buttery topping.
    • Melted butter works best. It helps cover the cake mix more evenly and prevents dry patches.
    • Watch for bubbling edges. The fruit should be bubbling around the edges when it's done.
    • Let it rest before serving. About 10-15 minutes helps it set and makes it easier to scoop.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 490kcal | Carbohydrates: 76g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 400mg | Potassium: 155mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 22g | Vitamin A: 811IU | Vitamin C: 4mg | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 1mg

    Dump Cake Recipe (Easy 3-Ingredient Dessert That Always Works)

    April 26, 2026

    A serving of 3-ingredient dump cake in a bowl with a dollop of homemade whipped cream.

    This dump cake recipe is one of the easiest desserts you can make, using just a few simple ingredients layered and baked into a warm, buttery cake. It's simple, reliable, and turns out every time.

    This old-fashioned dump cake recipe is known for its simplicity, no mixing, no complicated steps, and consistent results every time.

    A No-Fuss Dessert That Always Works

    This version uses cherry pie filling as a classic option, but the beauty of a dump cake recipe is how flexible it is. You can easily swap in peach, apple, blueberry, or whatever you have on hand and still get the same easy, crowd-pleasing result. For more variations and flavor ideas, browse all of my dump cake recipes here.

    A serving of dump cake in a bowl, topped with a dollop of homemade whipped cream.

    If you're looking for more easy desserts, you may also enjoy my strawberry cheesecake dump cake or peach cobbler with canned peaches.

    Table of Contents

    • A No-Fuss Dessert That Always Works
    • FAQs
    • Ingredients
    • Instructions
    • Dump Cake Variations

    FAQs

    What is dump cake?

    Dump cake is a simple dessert made by layering fruit filling, dry cake mix, and butter, then baking it until the top is golden and the filling is bubbly. There's no mixing involved, which is where the name comes from.

    Do you stir dump cake?

    No, you don't stir dump cake. The layers stay separate as they bake, creating a soft fruit layer on the bottom and a crumbly, buttery topping on top.

    What is the best fruit for dump cake?

    Cherry is the most traditional, but peach, apple, blueberry, and even pineapple all work well. This dump cake recipe is designed to be flexible depending on what you have.

    Can you make dump cake ahead of time?

    Yes, dump cake can be made ahead and reheated before serving. It's best served warm, but it will still taste great the next day.

    How do you store dump cake?

    Store leftovers covered in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days. Reheat in the microwave or oven until warmed through before serving.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    • Fruit pie filling (such as cherry) - Adds sweetness and flavor. Cherry is a classic choice, but peach, apple, or blueberry all work well.
    • Boxed cake mix - Creates that buttery, crumbly topping. Yellow cake mix is the most traditional choice.
    • Butter - Adds richness and helps the topping bake evenly.
    Ingredients to make a 3-ingredient dump cake, cake mix, canned pie filling and butter.

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven and lightly grease a baking dish.
    • Pour the cherry pie filling into the dish and spread evenly.
    Cherry pie filling poured in to 9x13 baking dish.
    • Sprinkle the dry cake mix evenly over the fruit but do not stir.
    Yellow cake mix sprinkled and spread on as an even layer on top of pie filling.
    • Add butter on top, either sliced or melted and drizzled evenly.
    Melted butter poured on top of cake mix for dump cake.
    • Bake until the top is golden and the filling is bubbling.
    Baked dump cake in 9x13 baking pan.
    • Let cool slightly, then serve warm.

    Dump Cake Variations

    This dump cake recipe is easy to customize using different fruit fillings and flavors. Here are a few simple variations to try depending on what you have on hand or the season:

    • Peach Dump Cake – Use canned peaches for a softer, sweeter version.
    • Apple Dump Cake – A classic dump cake recipe variation that's perfect for fall, especially with cinnamon added.
    • Cherry Pineapple Dump Cake – Now 4 ingredients since it’s cherry and pineapple, but still super easy.
    • Blueberry Dump Cake – A slightly more tart option with a rich color.
    • Strawberry Dump Cake – Another bright red version of this 3-ingredient dump cake recipe.
    • Pear Dump Cake – Canned pears (drained) are a lovely touch in this recipe as well.
    • Berry Dump Cake - Combine blueberry and strawberry pie filling for a mixed berry version.
    A serving of dump cake in a vintage bowl.

    Tips for the Best Dump Cake

    • Use the tilt method for even butter coverage. After pouring melted butter, gently tilt the pan so it spreads across the surface. If you see dry spots or mounds of cake mix, lightly smooth them with a fork, then tilt again so the butter settles into those areas.
    • Don't stir the layers. Dump cake works by layering the ingredients, which creates a soft fruit base and a buttery, crumbly topping as it bakes.
    • Melted butter works better than slices. While sliced butter can work, melted butter helps cover the cake mix more evenly and reduces the chance of dry patches.
    • Watch for bubbling edges. The top may look done before the inside is ready. Look for the fruit filling bubbling around the edges to know it's fully baked.
    • Check for dry spots before removing. If you see any powdery areas on top, it likely needs a few more minutes in the oven or a little more butter.
    • Let it rest before serving. Giving it 10-15 minutes to cool helps it set and makes it easier to scoop without falling apart.
    • Serve it warm for best texture. Dump cake is at its best when warm, especially with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or whipped cream.
    A bite-size of dump cake being held by spoon, above bowl.

    Related Recipes

    Looking for more dump cake recipes and easy fruit desserts? Here are a few reader favorites to try next:

    • Caramel Apple Dump Cake - A cozy, fall-inspired version with tender apples, warm spices, and a rich caramel flavor that feels perfect for holidays and gatherings.
    • Chocolate Cherry Dump Cake - A richer twist on the classic, combining chocolate cake mix with cherry filling for a dessert that feels a little more indulgent.
    • Pumpkin Dump Cake - A cozy, fall-inspired version with warm spices and a soft, creamy texture that feels like pumpkin pie meets cake.
    • Pineapple Dump Cake - Bright and buttery with a sweet, tropical flavor that's especially good served warm with whipped cream or ice cream.
    • Banana Dump Cake - A softer, sweet variation that's perfect for using ripe bananas and has a flavor similar to banana bread in dessert form.

    Recipe

    A serving of 3-ingredient dump cake in a bowl with a dollop of homemade whipped cream.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Dump Cake Recipe

    This easy dump cake recipe is a classic 3-ingredient dessert made with fruit filling, cake mix, and butter, creating a warm, buttery topping with minimal effort.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 322kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 – 21 ounce cans cherry pie filling or peach, apple, or other fruit fillings.
    • 15.25 ounces box yellow cake mix
    • 1 cup unsalted butter 2 sticks, sliced thin or melted for drizzle option

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F and lightly grease a 9×13 baking dish
    • Pour both cans of the cherry pie filling into the dish and spread evenly
    • Sprinkle the dry cake mix evenly over the top. (Tip: smoothing cake mix out with a fork is a great way to make this even.) DO NOT STIR.
    • Add butter: You can lay the thin slices across the top or you can drizzle the melted butter over the top.
      TIP: After adding the melted butter, gently tilt the baking dish to help it spread across the cake mix. If you notice dry spots, use a fork to lightly smooth the surface, then tilt again so the butter settles into those areas.
    • Bake at 350°F for 45-50 minutes, until the top is golden and the filling is bubbling.
    • Let cool slightly and serve warm, topped with ice cream if desired.

    Video

    Notes

    For best results, bake until the fruit filling is bubbling around the edges. This ensures the cake mix has fully absorbed moisture and the topping is properly baked.
    Do not stir the layers. Dump cake is designed to bake in layers, creating a soft fruit base and a buttery topping.
    Use the tilt method for even butter coverage. After pouring melted butter, gently tilt the pan so it runs across the surface. If you see dry patches or mounds of cake mix, lightly smooth them with a fork, then tilt again so the butter settles into those areas. This helps prevent dry or powdery spots after baking.
    Check for doneness before removing. The top may look golden before the inside is fully baked. Lift a small section to make sure there are no dry or powdery patches.
    Let it rest before serving. Allow the dump cake to cool for 10–15 minutes so it sets and is easier to scoop.
    This recipe uses cherry pie filling as a classic option, but you can easily substitute peach, apple, blueberry, or other fruit fillings.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 322kcal | Carbohydrates: 36g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 49mg | Sodium: 317mg | Potassium: 26mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 19g | Vitamin A: 568IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 97mg | Iron: 1mg

    Orange Upside Down Cake

    April 24, 2026

    Orange upside down cake sliced on spatula.

    Orange Upside Down Cake is a soft, citrusy cake baked over caramelized orange slices that turn into a glossy, beautiful topping when flipped. It's an easy, from-scratch dessert that looks impressive but is surprisingly simple to make.

    A Bright, Old-Fashioned Cake That Feels Special Every Time

    This is the kind of dessert that feels like it came straight from a vintage church cookbook (like this Pea Pickin’ Cake made with mandarin oranges) but still works perfectly today.

    A whole orange upside down cake on wooden cutting board.

    The oranges soften as they bake, creating a lightly caramelized layer that pairs perfectly with the moist, tender cake underneath. It's simple, reliable, and one of those cakes that always gets attention when you turn it out onto a plate. Much like this strawberry upside down cake, once flipped, the strawberries create a beautiful topping that's sweet, buttery, and full of old-fashioned strawberry flavor.

    FAQs

    Can I use different types of oranges?

    Yes, and it's a great way to change both flavor and color.
    Navel oranges are mild and classic
    Cara Cara oranges are sweeter with a slight pink hue
    Blood oranges give a deeper color and slightly richer flavor
    Mandarins or Cuties are smaller and sweeter

    Why does my orange upside-down cake taste bitter?

    Bitterness usually comes from the white pith on the oranges.
    Slice oranges thin. Trim off excess pith when possible
    The sugar helps balance it, but removing the pith makes the biggest difference.

    How do you keep an upside down cake from sticking?

    The butter layer acts as a natural release
    Do not skip the butter and sugar layer
    Let the cake cool about 30 minutes before flipping
    Run a knife around the edge if needed

    When should I flip an upside-down cake?

    Let it cool for about 30 minutes, then flip while still slightly warm.
    Too hot and it can fall apart
    Too cool and the topping can stick

    Can I make this cake ahead of time?

    Yes. This cake holds up well and can be made the day before serving.
    Store it covered at room temperature, and the flavor actually deepens slightly.

    Why is my upside down cake soggy?

    This usually happens when:
    Orange slices are too thick
    There is too much moisture from the fruit
    The cake isn't baked long enough
    Thin slices and a fully baked center prevent this.

    Can I use a cake mix instead?

    You can use a yellow or white cake mix, but adding orange zest and a little juice will help bring back that fresh citrus flavor.

    How do I store orange upside down cake?

    Room Temperature: Covered for up to 3 days
    Refrigerator: Up to 5 days
    Freezer: Up to 2 months (thaw overnight in fridge)

    What does orange upside down cake taste like?

    Texture: Soft, moist cake with tender orange slices
    Flavor: Sweet citrus with a light tang and buttery finish

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients for orange upside down cake.

    Orange Topping

    • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted
    • ¼ cup sugar
    • 16-20 orange slices (about ⅛ to ¼ inch thick)

    Orange Cake

    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup granulated sugar
    • ½ cup oil (canola or vegetable)
    • 2 large eggs, room temperature
    • 2 tablespoons fresh orange juice
    • 1 tablespoon orange zest
    • ¼ cup sour cream
    • ¾ cup milk

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Pour melted butter into a 9-inch round cake pan.
    • Sprinkle sugar evenly over the butter.
    • Arrange orange slices in a slightly overlapping layer across the bottom.
    Oranges, butter and sugar in bottom of cake pan.
    • In a bowl, whisk together flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt.
    Flour and dry ingredients in mixing bowl.
    • In a separate bowl, beat sugar and oil until combined.
    • Add eggs, orange juice, and zest, mixing until smooth.
    Eggs, sugar, orange juice, orange zest, and oil in mixing bowl.
    • Mix in the sour cream.
    Sour cream added to mixing bowl with orange zest, eggs and sugar.
    • Add dry ingredients and mix until thick.
    Dry ingredients added to wet ingredients.
    • Pour in milk and mix until batter is smooth.
    Milk added to orange cake batter.
    • Carefully pour batter over orange slices.
    Orange cake batter poured in to round cake pan.
    • Bake for 45-50 minutes, until golden and a toothpick comes out clean.
    Baked orange upside down cake.
    • Cool for 30 minutes, then invert onto a serving plate. Slice and enjoy!
    Round, orange upside down cake.

    Tips

    • Slice the oranges thinly for the best texture
    • Remove excess pith to reduce bitterness
    • Let the cake rest before flipping so the topping stays intact
    • Use room temperature ingredients for even baking
    • Bake until the center is fully set to avoid sogginess
    • Serve this cake with this orange punch recipe at a baby shower or party that has an orange theme.
    A spatula holding a piece of orange upside down cake.

    More Recipes You'll Love

    • Pineapple Dump Cake - A classic version with a caramelized fruit topping.
    • Lemon Poke Cake - Light, bright, and full of citrus flavor.
    • Orange Fluff Salad - Sweet, creamy orange flavor with a nostalgic feel.
    • 7 Up Cake - Another citrus cake, this easy, vintage-style cake is always a hit.

    Recipe

    Orange upside down cake sliced on spatula.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Orange Upside Down Cake

    This orange upside down cake is a soft, citrus-forward dessert topped with caramelized orange slices that create a beautiful, glossy finish.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 slices
    Calories 451kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Orange Topping:

    • 5 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
    • ¼ cup sugar
    • 16-20 orange slices about ⅛ to ¼ inch thick

    Orange Cake:

    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour spooned and leveled
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup granulated sugar
    • ½ cup oil
    • 2 large eggs room temperature
    • 2 tablespoons fresh-squeezed orange juice
    • 1 tablespoon orange zest
    • ¼ cup sour cream
    • ¾ cup milk

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. Pour the melted butter into a 9-inch round cake pan. Sprinkle the sugar over the butter, then layer the orange slices so that they overlap a little bit. Set the pan aside.
      Oranges and sugar in bottom of round cake pan.
    • Whisk the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt together in a small bowl.
      Flour and dry ingredients in mixing bowl.
    • In a separate large bowl, use an electric mixer to beat the sugar and oil together. Add the eggs, orange juice, and zest, and mix until combined.
      Eggs, sugar and oil in mixing bowl.
    • Mix in the sour cream.
    • Add the dry ingredients and mix until the batter becomes thick and dry. Then pour in the milk and mix until well combined.
    • Carefully pour the batter into the cake pan over the orange slices.
      Orange upside down cake poured in to round cake pan.
    • Bake for 45-50 minutes or until the top is golden brown and a toothpick inserted in the center of the cake comes out clean.
      Baked orange upside down cake.
    • Let the cake cool in the pan for 30 minutes before inverting it onto a cake stand or platter to finish colling.
    • Slice and serve at room temperature.

    Notes

    • Slice the oranges thin for best texture
    • Remove excess pith to reduce bitterness
    • Let the cake rest before flipping so topping stays intact
    • Use room temperature ingredients for even baking
    • Bake until the center is fully set to avoid sogginess

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 451kcal | Carbohydrates: 54g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 7g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.3g | Cholesterol: 67mg | Sodium: 363mg | Potassium: 144mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 35g | Vitamin A: 431IU | Vitamin C: 17mg | Calcium: 89mg | Iron: 1mg

    Hot Fudge Sauce Recipe

    April 22, 2026

    Hot fudge sauce dripping from spoon in to bowl.

    This hot fudge sauce recipe is rich, smooth, and made with simple pantry ingredients. It's an easy homemade chocolate sauce that comes together on the stovetop in minutes, just as lovely as this Vanilla Sauce recipe.

    A No-Fuss Dessert Sauce That Always Hits

    This is the kind of recipe you make once and never need another version again. It's simple, reliable, uses only a few ingredients, and has that old-fashioned flavor that feels like something you'd find in a church cookbook or at a family gathering. No complicated steps, no special tools, just a creamy chocolate sauce that turns any scoop of ice cream into something extra special.

    Hot fudge being dripped from spoon back in to bowl.

    FAQs

    Can I store homemade hot fudge sauce?

    Yes. Store it in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to one week.

    How do I reheat hot fudge sauce?

    Warm it in the microwave in short intervals, stirring in between, or heat it gently on the stovetop until smooth.

    Does hot fudge sauce thicken as it cools?

    Yes. It will thicken quite a bit as it cools, which is exactly what gives it that classic hot fudge texture.

    Can I freeze hot fudge sauce?

    You can, but the texture may change slightly after thawing. For best results, store in the refrigerator and use within a week.

    What's the difference between chocolate sauce and hot fudge?

    Hot fudge is thicker and richer, while chocolate sauce is usually thinner and more pourable.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients to make hot fudge sauce on counter.
    • ½ cup butter - Adds richness and helps create that smooth, creamy texture
    • 1 cup chocolate chips - The base chocolate flavor that melts into the sauce. I have used milk chocolate and semi-sweet, and have even combined the two and each time it works out great. I’ve also used chocolate chunks. The key for the best hot fudge is to use quality chocolate.
    • 2 cups powdered sugar - Sweetens the sauce and helps give it that classic fudge consistency
    • 12 ounces evaporated milk - Makes the sauce silky and helps everything blend together

    Instructions

    • In a medium saucepan, combine butter, chocolate chips, powdered sugar, and evaporated milk
    Butter, powdered sugar, evaporated milk and chocolate chips in sauce pan for hot fudge recipe.
    • Place over medium heat and stir constantly as everything melts together
    Hot fudge sauce in saucepan with wooden spoon.
    • Bring the mixture to a gentle boil
    • Continue cooking and stirring for 8 to 10 minutes until thickened
    • Remove from heat and allow it to cool slightly
    Hot fudge sauce in small glass container.
    • Serve warm over ice cream or your favorite dessert, like I did with this chocolate chip cookie pie…
    Hot fudge sauce drizzled over chocolate chip cookie pie.

    Tips

    • Stir constantly to prevent the chocolate from scorching
    • Don't rush the boiling step, this is what thickens the sauce
    • If it gets too thick after cooling, just reheat and stir until smooth
    • Use good-quality chocolate chips for the best flavor

    What to Serve Hot Fudge Sauce With

    • Ice cream – This peanut buster parfait is a must with hot fudge, just like this cookies and cream milkshake and ice cream sandwich cake.
    • Breakfast Recipes – These chocolate waffles and Oreo pancakes are perfectly paired with hot chocolate fudge sauce.
    • Cakes – Drizzle this hot fudge on top of vanilla mug cake, Oreo mug cake, or this Milky Way cake for extra chocolate love.
    • Pies – Peanut Butter Pie and Turtle Pie are classic flavors that are elevated when topped with hot fudge sauce.
    Hot fudge sauce drizzled over vanilla ice cream in serving dish.

    Related Recipes

    If you love classic, old-fashioned dessert recipes, you’ll also love these favorites…

    • Hot Fudge Cake
    • Depression Chocolate Cake
    • Peanut Butter Cake

    Recipe

    Hot fudge sauce dripping from spoon in to bowl.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Hot Fudge Sauce Recipe (Easy Homemade Chocolate Sauce)

    This rich, homemade hot fudge sauce is made with simple pantry ingredients and comes together on the stovetop in minutes for a smooth, chocolatey topping that thickens as it cools.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 10 minutes minutes
    Total Time 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 24 servings
    Calories 130kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • ½ cup unsalted butter
    • 1 cup chocolate chips
    • 2 cups powdered sugar
    • 12 ounces evaporated milk about 1½ cups

    Instructions

    • In a medium saucepan, combine butter, chocolate chips, powdered sugar, and evaporated milk
      Butter, powdered sugar, evaporated milk and chocolate chips in sauce pan for hot fudge recipe.
    • Place over medium heat and stir constantly as everything melts together
      Hot fudge sauce in saucepan with wooden spoon.
    • Bring the mixture to a gentle boil
    • Continue cooking and stirring for 8 to 10 minutes until thickened
    • Remove from heat and allow it to cool slightly
    • Serve warm over ice cream or your favorite dessert
      Hot fudge sauce drizzled over vanilla ice cream in serving dish.

    Video

    Notes

    This yields about 3 cups.
    • Stir constantly to prevent the chocolate from scorching
    • Don't rush the boiling step, this is what thickens the sauce
    • If it gets too thick after cooling, just reheat and stir until smooth
    • Use good-quality chocolate chips for the best flavor

    Nutrition

    Serving: 2tablespoons | Calories: 130kcal | Carbohydrates: 17g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.2g | Cholesterol: 15mg | Sodium: 51mg | Potassium: 44mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 169IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 47mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Baseball Snack Ideas for Kids (Easy + Team Snack Ideas Moms Love)

    April 21, 2026

    A basket full of baseball snack ideas.

    Easy baseball snack ideas for kids and simple team snack ideas that are mess-free, packable, and perfect for busy game days.

    A whicker basket full of baseball snack ideas.

    If you’ve ever been on snack duty for your kid’s baseball team and wondered what in the world to bring, you’re not alone. Between games, practices, and busy weeknights, having a few easy, no-mess snack ideas makes everything feel a little less chaotic.

    These baseball snack ideas also work perfectly when you need baseball team snack ideas for rotating snack duty or planning what to bring for the whole team.

    Whether you’re bringing snacks for your own kids or the whole team, these baseball snack ideas are practical, easy to pack, and simple to hand out so you’re not trying to organize food while kids are running all over the field after the game.

    Most of the time, simple really is best. Kids are usually just excited to get a snack, and having something ready to go makes everything run smoother.

    What Makes a Good Baseball Snack?

    When you’re packing snacks for a game or practice, a few simple things make a big difference.

    • easy to pack
    • not messy
    • holds up in a bag or cooler
    • quick to eat between innings
    • filling enough to hold them over

    Baseball Team Snack Ideas (Easy Snack Ideas for Baseball Teams)

    If you’re responsible for bringing snacks for the whole team, these are the easiest options that parents actually rely on.

    Individual or Packaged Snacks (Best for Teams)

    • applesauce pouches
    • granola bars
    • pre-packaged crackers
    • bananas
    • apples
    • clementines or cuties

      Why:
    • easy to hand out
    • parent-approved

    Easy Store-Bought Team Snacks (Quick Grab Ideas)

    If you don't have time to prep anything, store-bought snacks are usually the easiest option for team snack days. These are the kinds of things parents grab all the time because they're quick, affordable, and easy to hand out.

    • mini muffins
    • Goldfish crackers or Cheez-Its
    • pretzels
    • granola bars
    • Skinny Pop popcorn
    • applesauce pouches
    • string cheese
    • Slim Jims or beef sticks
    • snack-size chip bags

    These aren't fancy, but they get the job done, and most kids are just excited to get something after the game.

    Goldfish cracker packs, applesauce pouches and clementines sitting on table for baseball snacks.

    Homemade Team Snack Ideas

    If bringing homemade snacks, individually wrapping or portioning them ahead of time makes it much easier to pass out after the game.

    • mini muffins
    • cookies
    • Rice Krispies treats
    • snack bars

    Baseball Snack Bag Ideas (Easy Grab-and-Go Options)

    If you're putting together snacks for the whole team, these baseball snack bag ideas make it easy to prep everything ahead of time and hand them out quickly after the game.

    • applesauce pouch
    • granola bar
    • juice box goldfish
    • fruit snacks
    • mini cookies
    • orange slices
    • string cheese
    • crackers
    • yogurt tube (frozen)
    • snack bar
    • mini muffins
    • apple slices (tip: soak in lemon juice ahead of time to prevent browning)
    • water bottle

    What to Avoid for Team Snacks

    • peanut products (allergies)
    • messy or sticky desserts
    • chocolate (melts)
    • anything requiring utensils

    If your team rotates snack duty, keeping it simple is always the best approach. Most teams just need something quick and easy to hand out, nothing fancy required.

    Fun Baseball-Themed Snacks (Optional Ideas)

    If you want to make snacks a little more fun, you can add a few simple baseball-themed touches. This is completely optional, but it can be fun for special games or the first or last game of the season.

    A few easy ideas:

    • sugar cookies decorated like baseballs
    • cupcakes with simple baseball stitching
    • donuts decorated like baseballs
    • string cheese or bananas with drawn-on "laces"
    • Rice Krispies treats shaped into balls
    • popcorn balls in baseball wrapper (plastic wrap with baseball stitching)
    • Happy meals or kids meals if a lunch time game
    • pizza if it’s a tournament and they’re hanging around (Tip: Have the restaurant cut them into party-size slices)

    These can be fun for occasional treats, but for most games, simple and easy snacks are usually the best option.

    Fun End-of-Season or Game Day Treat Ideas

    If you want to do something a little more fun for the last game of the season or a special game day, adding a small treat can be a fun way to celebrate. This isn't something most teams do every week, but it can be a nice surprise every once in a while.

    • baseball-themed ring pops
    • Big League Chew Gum
    • baseball-shaped suckers
    • or fill baseball-themed treat bags with candy/snacks

    Easy Baseball Snacks for Kids (Mess-Free + Packable)

    Fresh and Simple

    • grapes (washed and portioned)
    • apple slices (tossed in lemon juice)
    • oranges or clementines
    • banana halves
    • strawberries (whole or halved)

    Protein Snacks

    • string cheese
    • cheese cubes and crackers
    • turkey or ham roll-ups
    • hard boiled eggs
    • peanut butter sandwich halves

    Crunchy Snacks

    • pretzels
    • goldfish or crackers
    • popcorn (bagged ahead)
    • tortilla chips
    • sunflower seeds

    Sweet Treats

    • blueberry muffins
    • cookies
    • snack bars
    • mini brownies

    Grab-and-Go Favorites

    • granola bars
    • applesauce pouches
    • yogurt tubes (freeze ahead = ice pack too)
    • juice boxes

    Snacks That Hold Up in a Cooler

    • yogurt
    • cheese
    • cut fruit
    • pasta salad (small portions)
    • sandwiches
    • turkey sliders
    Baseball snacks in a basket.

    Last-Minute Baseball Snacks (5-Minute Ideas)

    • peanut butter and jelly sandwich
    • crackers and cheese
    • banana
    • granola bar
    • trail mix or snack mix

    Easy Drinks for Baseball Games

    Drinks are usually just as important as the snacks, especially during warm games. Keeping it simple and easy to hand out is usually the best approach.

    A cooler full of sports drinks and bottled water.

    Easy drink ideas for teams:

    • bottled water
    • juice boxes or juice pouches (Capri Suns, apple juice boxes, etc.)
    • sports drinks like Gatorade, Bodyarmor (for longer or hotter games)

    Quick tips for drinks:

    • stick with individual bottles or boxes so they're easy to pass out
    • avoid anything that needs cups or pouring
    • keep drinks cold in a small cooler or insulated bag

    Most teams keep drinks simple, and water is always a safe choice if you’re not sure what to bring.

    Tips for Packing Baseball Snacks

    A little prep ahead of time can make game days a lot less stressful, especially when you know you'll need snacks more than once during the week.

    • use small containers or baggies
    • freeze items to keep them cold
    • keep it simple
    • prep a few ahead for the week

    FAQs About Baseball Team Snacks

    What should I bring for baseball team snacks?

    The best team snacks are simple, individually portioned, and easy to hand out. Things like orange slices, applesauce pouches, granola bars, crackers, and juice boxes are popular because they're mess-free and quick for kids to grab after a game.

    How many snacks should I bring for a team?

    Plan to bring one for each player, plus a couple extras. There's almost always an extra sibling or friend hanging around, and it's nice to have a few backups so no one gets left out.

    Do baseball team snacks need to be healthy?

    They don't have to be perfect but just balanced and practical. Many parents aim for a mix of something fresh (like fruit) and something filling (like crackers or a granola bar) to help kids refuel after playing.

    Are homemade snacks okay for team snacks?

    Homemade snacks can be great, but it's best to keep them simple and individually portioned. Muffins, cookies, or bars work well when wrapped or placed in small bags. Always be mindful of allergies when bringing homemade items.

    What snacks should I avoid bringing to a baseball game?

    Try to avoid anything messy, sticky, or that melts easily. Chocolate, frosted treats, and foods that require utensils can be difficult to manage on the field. It's also best to avoid common allergens like peanuts unless you know it's allowed.

    What drinks should I bring for team snacks?

    Water bottles are always a safe and easy choice. Juice boxes or sports drinks can also be included, especially for longer or hotter games, but keeping it simple is usually best.

    Can I bring the same snack every time it's my turn?

    Absolutely. Most teams appreciate consistency, and kids usually love familiar snacks. There's no need to overthink it! Simple and reliable is always a win.

    Strawberry Bread with Strawberry Icing

    April 15, 2026

    Strawberry Bread loaf with Strawberry Icing, dripping down the side.

    This strawberry bread is a soft, moist quick bread made with strawberry gelatin for bold flavor and a beautiful pink color. Topped with a simple strawberry icing, it's an easy, nostalgic treat that feels a little extra special, much like this strawberry jello cake that’s so popular.

    A No-Fuss Strawberry Treat That Always Works

    This is one of those recipes that surprises people in the best way, maybe as much as my strawberry brownies recipe. It's simple, dependable, and gives you that old-fashioned quick bread texture with a fun strawberry twist. The crumb is dense but soft, the flavor is balanced, and it slices beautifully for sharing. If you’re looking for a strawberry bread with a twist, this strawberry lemonade bread has a bright, sweet, yet tart flavor.

    Sliced strawberry bread with strawberry icing, with strawberry topping.

    It's perfect for spring gatherings, baby showers, brunch tables, or just a "something sweet on the counter" kind of day. And if you're used to quick breads turning out dry or bland, this one fixes that. The yogurt and oil combo keeps it tender every single time, just like in this cherry bread recipe.

    FAQs

    How do you store strawberry bread?

    Store tightly covered at room temperature for up to 3 days. For longer storage, keep it in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Can you freeze strawberry bread?

    Yes. Wrap the whole loaf tightly in plastic wrap and foil, or freeze individual slices. Freeze for up to 3 months and thaw at room temperature. Add glaze after thawing for best results.

    Can I use butter instead of oil?

    You can, but oil gives a softer, more moist texture. Butter adds flavor but creates a slightly firmer crumb.

    Can I use milk instead of buttermilk?

    Yes. For a similar result, add 1 tablespoon of lemon juice or vinegar to milk and let it sit for 5 minutes before using.

    Can I add fresh strawberries?

    Yes. Add about ½ cup finely chopped strawberries, patted dry, and gently fold them in at the end.

    Why did my bread sink in the middle?

    This usually means it needed more bake time or the batter had too much moisture. Always check doneness with a toothpick before removing from the oven.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list, and instructions.

    • All-purpose flour (1 ¾ cups) - gives the bread structure
    • Baking powder (1 teaspoon) - helps it rise
    • Baking soda (½ teaspoon) - adds tenderness and lift
    • Salt (½ teaspoon) - balances the sweetness
    • Oil (½ cup) - keeps the bread moist and soft
    • Granulated sugar (¾ cup) - sweetens and helps with texture
    • Eggs (2, room temperature) - bind everything together
    • Greek yogurt (¾ cup) - adds richness and keeps the crumb tender
    • Buttermilk (¼ cup) - adds moisture and slight tang
    • Vanilla extract (1 teaspoon) - adds warmth
    • Almond extract (¼ teaspoon) - enhances the strawberry flavor
    • Strawberry Jello powder (1 box, divided) - provides flavor and color

    For the Strawberry Icing (Optional but recommended)

    • Powdered sugar (1 cup) - creates a smooth glaze
    • Reserved strawberry Jello powder (1 tablespoon) - adds color and flavor
    • Milk (1-2 tablespoons) - thins the glaze to desired consistency
    Ingredients to make strawberry bread loaf recipe.

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350°F. Grease and line a loaf pan with parchment paper.
    • Set aside 1 tablespoon of strawberry Jello powder for the glaze.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt.
    Dry ingredients mixed together in mixing bowl for strawberry bread.
    • In a large bowl, whisk oil, sugar, and eggs until smooth and slightly thickened.
    Eggs, sugar, and oil mixed together in mixing bowl for strawberry bread.
    • Add Greek yogurt, buttermilk, vanilla, and almond extract. Mix until smooth.
    Yogurt, buttermilk and vanilla added to egg and sugar mixture for strawberry bread.
    • Stir in remaining strawberry Jello powder until fully combined.
    Strawberry jello powder added to strawberry bread batter.
    • Gently fold dry ingredients into wet ingredients in batches. Do not overmix.
    Dry ingredients added to wet, jello batter for strawberry bread.
    • Pour batter into prepared pan.
    Strawberry bread batter in loaf pan.
    • Bake for 55-60 minutes, until a toothpick comes out clean.
    • Let sit in pan 10-15 minutes, then transfer to a wire rack to cool.
    Strawberry bread loaf on cooling rack.
    • For the glaze, whisk powdered sugar with reserved Jello powder. Add milk slowly until desired consistency is reached.
    Strawberry icing for strawberry loaf bread.
    • Drizzle or pipe glaze over cooled bread, then slice and serve.
    Strawberry icing poured on top of strawberry bread.

    Tips

    • Don't skip the almond extract. It quietly makes the strawberry flavor pop.
    • Use full-fat Greek yogurt for the best texture.
    • The pink color can trick you. Always rely on a toothpick test for doneness.
    • Avoid overmixing to keep the bread tender.
    • Fluff powdered sugar before measuring for a smoother glaze.
    Strawberry bread loaf, with strawberry glaze on the top.

    More Recipes You'll Love

    If you love this soft, nostalgic dessert, these are perfect to try next:

    • Strawberry Pound Cake - Soft, moist texture with strawberries baked right in
    • Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake - An easy, no-fuss dessert that's perfect for busy days
    • Strawberry Cheesecake Poke Cake - Fresh strawberries, creamy pudding, and whipped topping in this easy cake from a cake mix.
    • Strawberry Heaven - Angel food cake, pudding, and strawberry pie filling all come together in a heavenly dessert.

    Recipe

    Strawberry Bread loaf with Strawberry Icing, dripping down the side.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Strawberry Bread Recipe

    A soft, moist strawberry quick bread made with strawberry gelatin for bold flavor and a beautiful color, finished with a simple strawberry icing for the perfect sweet touch.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 55 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 10 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 slices
    Calories 433kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 ¾ cups all purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • ½ cup oil neutral flavor like vegetable or avocado oil
    • ¾ cup sugar
    • 2 eggs room temperature
    • ¾ cup Greek yogurt
    • ¼ cup buttermilk or milk
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon almond extract
    • 3 ounces box strawberry Jello powder, divided

    Optional Glaze

    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • 1 tablespoon reserved strawberry Jello powder
    • 1-2 tablespoons milk

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F. Grease and line a loaf pan with parchment paper, set aside.
    • Set aside 1 tablespoon of the strawberry Jello powder for the glaze.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together flour, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together oil, sugar, and eggs until smooth and slightly thickened.
    • Whisk in Greek yogurt, buttermilk, vanilla extract, and almond extract until smooth.
    • Stir in the remaining strawberry Jello powder until fully incorporated and evenly colored.
    • Gently fold dry ingredients into the wet mixture in batches until just combined. Do not overmix.
    • After filling the pan with batter, bake it for 55 to 60 minutes, or until a toothpick comes out clean.
    • Before glazing, let the pan sit for ten to fifteen minutes before moving it to a wire rack to cool for a further fifteen to twenty minutes.
    • Whisk together powdered sugar and reserved Jello powder. Add milk slowly until the desired consistency is reached.
    • Pipe or drizzle glaze over cooled bread. Slice and serve.

    Video

    Notes

    • Don't skip the almond extract. It doesn't make the bread taste like almond but it really brings out the strawberry flavor.
    • Use full-fat Greek yogurt for the best texture. It keeps the bread soft and rich instead of dry.
    • Mix the batter just until everything is combined. Overmixing can make the bread dense and tough.
    • The pink color can make it tricky to tell when it's done. Always check the center with a toothpick before removing from the oven.
    • If the top starts browning too quickly, loosely cover it with foil during the last part of baking.
    • Let the bread cool before adding the glaze so it doesn't melt and run off.
    • For a thicker glaze, use less milk. For a thinner drizzle, add a little more milk until it reaches the consistency you like.
    • Fluff the powdered sugar before measuring to help prevent lumps in the glaze.
    • If you want to add fresh strawberries, fold in about ½ cup of finely chopped berries after the batter is mixed. Pat them dry first.
    • If freezing, wait to add the glaze until after thawing for the best texture and appearance.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 433kcal | Carbohydrates: 66g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 2g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 4g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 43mg | Sodium: 352mg | Potassium: 86mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 45g | Vitamin A: 76IU | Calcium: 72mg | Iron: 2mg

    Lemon Lush (Easy Layered Lemon Delight Dessert)

    April 14, 2026

    A slice of lemon lush sitting on a clear plate, with a fork bite taken out.

    This lemon lush is a cool, creamy layered dessert made with a buttery cookie crust, sweet cream cheese filling, and a bright lemon pudding topping. It's an easy, no-fuss recipe that's perfect for potlucks, holidays, or anytime you need a make-ahead dessert, and similar to this popular Oreo dessert recipe.

    The Kind of Dessert That Always Shows Up First

    If you've ever flipped through an old church cookbook or stood in line at a potluck table, you've seen something like this no-bake dessert recipe.

    Lemon lush, sometimes called lemon delight or a layered lemon dessert, is one of those tried-and-true old-fashioned dessert recipes that just works. It's light but still rich, sweet with just the right amount of tang, and it feeds a crowd without a lot of effort.

    A slice of lemon lush on a plate, with a fork taking a bite off.

    This version keeps things simple with a shortbread cookie crust and pantry staples, giving you that same nostalgic flavor without any complicated steps.

    FAQs

    Do I have to bake the crust?

    Yes, just a quick bake helps the crust set so it holds together when sliced. It only takes a few minutes and makes a big difference.

    Can I make this ahead of time?

    Absolutely. This dessert is actually better when made ahead since it needs several hours to chill and set properly.

    How do I store lemon lush?

    Cover and store in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.

    Can I freeze it?

    Yes. You can freeze it for easier slicing or longer storage. Let it sit at room temperature for a few minutes before serving.

    Can I use a different crust?

    You can swap the shortbread cookies for graham cracker crumbs if you prefer.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients on counter to make lemon lush recipe.
    • 3 (5.5-ounce) bags shortbread cookies, crushed (about 3 cups): Make a buttery, slightly crisp crust that gives this dessert its sturdy base
    • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted: Helps bind the cookie crumbs together so the crust holds its shape
    • 8 ounces cream cheese, softened: Creates that rich, creamy layer that gives lemon lush its classic flavor and texture
    • 1 cup powdered sugar: Sweetens the cream cheese layer and keeps it smooth
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract: Adds a little warmth and rounds out the tangy cream cheese flavor
    • 16 ounces frozen whipped topping, thawed and divided: Lightens the filling and finishes the top with that signature fluffy layer
    • 2 (3.4-ounce) packages lemon instant pudding mix: Give the dessert its bright lemon flavor and create the creamy center layer
    • 3 cups whole milk, cold: Whisk with the pudding mix to make the lemon layer smooth and thick
    • Fresh lemon zest, for topping: Adds fresh citrus flavor and a pretty finish

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F and lightly grease a 9×13 baking dish.
    • Crush the shortbread cookies into fine crumbs. Set aside a small amount for topping, then mix the remaining crumbs with melted butter until evenly combined.
    Shortbread cookie crumbs and butter in mixing bowl.
    • Press the crumb mixture firmly into the bottom of the prepared baking dish. Bake for about 8 minutes, then remove and let cool completely.
    Graham cracker crust pressed in baking pan.
    • In a mixing bowl, beat the softened cream cheese, powdered sugar, and vanilla until smooth and creamy.
    • Fold in half of the whipped topping until light and combined. Spread this mixture evenly over the cooled crust.
    Cream cheese mixture layered on top of graham cracker crust in baking pan for lemon lush.
    • In a separate bowl, whisk together the pudding mix and cold milk until smooth. Let it sit briefly to thicken, then spread evenly over the cream cheese layer.
    Lemon pudding mix layered on top of cream cheese mixture in pan.
    • Spread the remaining whipped topping over the pudding layer.
    • Sprinkle with lemon zest and the reserved cookie crumbs.
    Cool Whip spread on top of lemon layer and lemon zest sprinkled on top for no-bake lemon dessert.
    • Cover and refrigerate for at least 4 hours, or overnight, until fully set before slicing and serving.
    A slice of lemon lush on a spatula.

    Tips

    • Make sure the crust is completely cooled before adding layers, so it doesn't soften
    • Use softened cream cheese to avoid lumps in the filling
    • Let the pudding thicken slightly before spreading for clean layers
    • Chill long enough so the slices hold their shape when serving
    • For cleaner cuts, chill or freeze briefly before slicing

    More Easy Lemon Desserts You'll Love

    If you love this lemon lush, you'll also love these easy old-fashioned potluck favorites that are just as simple to make.

    • Lemon Poke Cake – A soft, ultra-moist lemon cake that's filled and topped for that same cool, creamy texture everyone loves.
    • Lemon Dump Cake – An easy, no-fuss lemon dessert that comes together quickly and is perfect for feeding a crowd.
    • Lemon Cake Mix Brownies – A simple, pantry-friendly dessert with a soft, chewy texture and bright lemon flavor.
    • Lemon Blondies – A buttery, dense lemon dessert bar with a slightly richer texture but just as much fresh citrus flavor.

    Recipe

    A slice of lemon lush sitting on a clear plate, with a fork bite taken out.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Lemon Lush

    A layered lemon lush dessert with a buttery cookie crust, creamy cheesecake-style filling, and smooth lemon pudding, topped with whipped topping for an easy, crowd-pleasing favorite.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 8 minutes minutes
    Cooling Time 5 hours hours
    Total Time 5 hours hours 18 minutes minutes
    Servings 9 servings
    Calories 395kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 – 5.5 ounce bags shortbread cookies About 3 cups when crushed (We used Pepperidge Farms Dublin)
    • 8 tablespoons unsalted butter melted
    • 8 ounce package cream cheese softened
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 16 ounce package frozen whipped topping thawed, divided (i.e. Cool Whip)
    • 2 – 3.4 ounce packages lemon instant pudding mix
    • 3 cups whole milk cold
    • Fresh lemon zest for topping

    Instructions

    • Preheat oven to 350 degrees F, then lightly grease a 9×13 baking dish.
    • Crush cookies into fine crumbs then reserve 1-2 tablespoons for topping and add the rest to a mixing bowl and mix with melted butter, then press firmly into the prepared baking dish.
    • Bake crust for 8 minutes, then set aside to cool.
    • Add cream cheese, powdered sugar, and vanilla extract to a mixing bowl, then beat until creamy, about 2 minutes.
    • Fold in ½ of the thawed whipped topping.
    • Spread in an even layer over the cooled crust.
    • Add pudding mix and milk to a large mixing bowl and whisk until combined, let sit for 2 minutes to thicken, then spread evenly over cream cheese layer.
    • Spread remaining thawed whipped topping over lemon layer, then sprinkle with lemon zest and reserved cookie crumbs.
    • Cover and refrigerate for 4 hours to overnight, then serve.
    • Optionally, freeze for 20 minutes in order to be able to cut into squares or rectangles to serve.

    Notes

    • Make sure the crust is fully cooled before adding the cream cheese layer to prevent it from softening.
    • Use softened cream cheese so the filling mixes smooth and doesn't leave lumps.
    • Let the pudding sit for a couple of minutes after mixing so it thickens before spreading.
    • Spread each layer gently to keep the layers distinct and even.
    • For cleaner cuts, chill longer or place in the freezer for 15-20 minutes before slicing.
    • Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3-4 days.
    • You can substitute graham cracker crumbs for the shortbread cookie crust if preferred.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 395kcal | Carbohydrates: 31g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 28g | Saturated Fat: 19g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 6g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 63mg | Sodium: 150mg | Potassium: 210mg | Fiber: 0.004g | Sugar: 30g | Vitamin A: 819IU | Calcium: 163mg | Iron: 0.1mg

    Peach Cobbler Cheesecake (Easy Baked Recipe with Streusel Topping)

    April 11, 2026

    A slice of peach cobbler cheesecake sitting on a plate next to a fork.

    This peach cobbler cheesecake recipe combines a creamy baked cheesecake with sweet peaches and a buttery streusel topping. It's an easy, old-fashioned style dessert that feels special but is simple to make.

    A Bakery-Worthy Dessert That Still Feels Like Home

    This is the kind of dessert that turns heads at a potluck or holiday table. You get the richness of cheesecake, the comfort of peach cobbler, and that crumbly topping that makes people go back for seconds. It looks impressive, but it's surprisingly simple to make, so much like my coconut cheesecake recipe.

    This is a slice of peach cobbler cheesecake being pulled out from rest of cheesecake.

    This peach cobbler cheesecake recipe is perfect for potlucks, holidays, or anytime you want an easy dessert that feels a little special.

    It's reliable, uses simple ingredients, and has that nostalgic, cozy flavor your audience already loves. If they like dump cakes, cobblers, and layered desserts, this one fits right in.

    A slice of peach cobbler cheesecake on a plate with fork.

    FAQs

    Do I have to use a water bath?

    Yes, for best results. It helps the cheesecake bake evenly and prevents cracking.

    Can I use fresh peaches instead of canned?

    You can, but they'll need to be softened and thickened slightly so they don't release too much liquid.

    How do I know when cheesecake is done?

    The edges should be set, and the center should have a slight wobble when gently shaken.

    How to Store Cheesecake

    Store tightly covered in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Can I freeze cheesecake?

    Yes. Freeze without toppings for up to 2 months, then thaw overnight in the fridge.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients to make peach cobbler cheesecake on wooden table

    Crust

    • 1 sleeve honey graham crackers - creates that classic, slightly sweet base
    • 6 tablespoons salted butter, melted - binds the crust and adds richness
    • 2 tablespoons brown sugar, packed - deepens the flavor with a hint of molasses

    Cheesecake Filling

    • 3 (8 ounce) packages cream cheese, softened - gives the cheesecake its smooth, creamy texture
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar - sweetens without overpowering
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - adds warm, classic flavor
    • 4 large eggs, room temperature - helps set the cheesecake structure
    • ¾ cup sour cream, room temperature - adds tang and keeps it creamy
    • 1 (21 ounce) can peach pie filling, roughly chopped and divided - brings that cobbler-style fruit layer

    Streusel Topping

    • ½ cup all-purpose flour - forms the crumb base
    • ½ cup brown sugar, packed - adds sweetness and texture
    • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon - gives that cobbler warmth
    • 4 tablespoons salted butter, chilled and cubed - creates a crumbly topping

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven to 350°F and wrap the outside of a 9-inch springform pan with foil or a roasting bag.

    Pulse the graham crackers, melted butter, and brown sugar until crumbly. Press into the bottom and slightly up the sides of the pan. Bake until lightly golden, then let cool and reduce oven temperature.

    graham cracker crust mixture in food processor for cheesecake

    Beat the cream cheese, sugar, and vanilla until smooth. Add eggs one at a time on low speed, then mix in the sour cream just until combined.

    Cream cheese, vanilla, sugar in mixing bowl.

    In a separate bowl, combine flour, brown sugar, cinnamon, and butter. Cut the butter in until the mixture looks crumbly.

    Sugar, cinnamon and butter in mixing bowl for streusel topping.

    Pour half the cheesecake batter into the crust. Spoon half the peach filling over the batter, then sprinkle with some streusel.

    Half of the cheesecake batter poured in to baked crust, topped with peach mixture and topping.

    Add the remaining cheesecake batter and smooth the top. Finish with the rest of the peaches and remaining streusel.

    Remaining cheesecake batter poured in to spring pan, topped with peaches and topping.

    Place the cheesecake in a roasting pan and carefully add hot water around it.

    Spring pan sitting in roasting pan, and wrapped.

    Bake until the edges are set and the center has a slight wobble. Turn off the oven and let it sit with the door slightly open, then cool at room temperature before refrigerating until fully set.

    Baked peach cobbler cheesecake in spring form pan.

    Recipe Tips

    • Don't skip wrapping the pan well. Water leaks are the #1 cheesecake issue.
    • Mix on low speed to avoid adding too much air
    • Spoon peach filling gently so it layers instead of mixing in
    • Let it cool slowly to prevent cracks
    • Chill completely before slicing
    • Use a warm knife and wipe between cuts for clean slices
    A slice of peach cobbler cheesecake on a spatula, next to rest of cheesecake.

    More Desserts Like This

    If you love this peach cobbler cheesecake, here are a few more easy, old-fashioned desserts that are just as reliable and perfect for sharing.

    • Peach Cobbler with Canned Peaches - This is one of the easiest peach desserts you can make, with just a few ingredients and that same cozy cobbler flavor everyone loves.
    • Cherry Cheesecake (No-Bake) - A simple, creamy cheesecake with a fruit topping that's perfect when you don't want to turn on the oven.
    • Strawberry Jello Cake - Light, moist, and always a crowd favorite, especially for spring and summer gatherings.
    • Skilllet Blueberry Cobbler - A soft, sweet cobbler with juicy blueberries and a golden topping that's hard to beat.

    Recipe

    A slice of peach cobbler cheesecake sitting on a plate next to a fork.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Peach Cobbler Cheesecake

    This peach cobbler cheesecake blends creamy cheesecake, sweet peaches, and buttery streusel into one easy, crowd-pleasing dessert.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour 15 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 6 hours hours
    Total Time 7 hours hours 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 slices
    Calories 492kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Crust:

    • 1 sleeve honey graham crackers usually 9 graham crackers
    • 6 Tablespoons salted butter melted
    • 2 Tablespoons brown sugar packed

    Cheesecake:

    • 24 ounces cream cheese, softened 3, 8-ounce packages, softened
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 4 large eggs room temperature
    • ¾ cup sour cream room temperature
    • 21 ounces can peach pie filling roughly chopped and divided in half

    Streusel Topping:

    • ½ cup all purpose flour spooned and leveled
    • ½ cup brown sugar packed
    • ½ teaspoon ground cinnamon
    • 4 tablespoons ½ stick salted butter, chilled and cubed

    Instructions

    Graham Cracker Crust

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees F° and line the outside of a 9 inch springform pan with aluminum foil and/or a plastic roasting bag.
    • Add the graham crackers, melted butter, and sugar into a food processor or blender and pulse until it reaches a fine, crumbly mixture. Press into the bottom and up the sides of the springform pan.
      Graham crackers and butter in food processor.
    • Bake in the oven for 10 minutes or until lightly golden. Set aside to cool and turn the oven down to 325 degrees F.

    Cheesecake Filling

    • In a large bowl, beat the softened cream cheese, granulated sugar, and vanilla until smooth.
      Cream cheese, vanilla, sugar in mixing bowl.
    • Mix in the eggs one at a time on low. Do not overmix.
    • Stir in sour cream until just combined.
    • Set aside and prepare the streusel topping by adding the flour, ½ cup brown sugar, cinnamon, and butter into a medium sized bowl.
      Butter, flour, cinnamon and brown sugar in mixing bowl for cheesecake crumble.
    • Cut in the butter with a pastry cutter or two knives until the mixture resembles coarse meal.
    • Pour half of the cheesecake batter into the cooled crust.
    • Spoon half peach pie filling evenly over the batter followed by ⅓ of the topping.
      Half of the cheesecake batter poured in to baked crust, topped with peach mixture and topping.
    • Slowly add remaining cheesecake batter and smooth the top.
    • Add on the remaining half of the peach pie filling and ⅔ of the streusel topping.
      Remaining cheesecake batter poured in to spring pan, topped with peaches and topping.
    • Place cheesecake into a roast pan or large oven safe pan and carefully pour hot water into the roast pan until it reaches halfway up the sides of the pan.
      Cheesecake in roasting pan with wrapped springform pan.
    • Bake for 75-85 minutes or until set with a slight wobble in the center.
    • Turn off the oven and prop the oven door open with a wooden spoon for 1 hour.
      Baked peach cobbler cheesecake in springform pan
    • Take out of the oven and place on the countertop and cool for an additional 1 hour before placing in the refrigerator for 4-6 hours or overnight until set.

    Notes

    • Wrap the springform pan tightly to prevent water leaks
    • Bake until center slightly jiggles, not fully firm
    • Cool gradually in oven to avoid cracks
    • Chill at least 6 hours before slicing
    • Use canned peach filling for consistency and ease

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 492kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 19g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 145mg | Sodium: 306mg | Potassium: 160mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 33g | Vitamin A: 1234IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 94mg | Iron: 1mg

    Westhaven Cake

    April 7, 2026

    A slice of Westhaven cake on a round plate.

    Westhaven cake is a rich, old-fashioned chocolate cake made with softened dates and topped with warm fudge icing. It's baked in a simple 9×13 pan and known for its ultra-moist texture and deep, nostalgic flavor.

    An Old-Fashioned Cake That Still Deserves a Spot on the Table

    This is the kind of recipe that feels like it came from a handwritten card tucked in a church cookbook.

    It's not flashy. It's not trendy. But it's the one people ask about after the first bite, like so many of these old-fashioned potluck cakes.

    A slice of chocolate date Westhaven cake on a round plate with a fork taking a bite off of the corner.

    The dates melt right into the batter, giving the cake a soft, almost velvety texture and a rich flavor that leans more caramel than chocolate. Then that warm fudge icing gets poured right over the top while everything is still warm, settling into the surface just enough to create that signature soft, chocolatey layer.

    It's dependable. It travels well. And it's exactly the kind of cake that disappears first at a potluck, just like this chocolate depression cake recipe and this sock it to me cake.

    Why Is It Called Westhaven Cake?

    Like a lot of old-fashioned recipes, the exact origin of Westhaven cake isn't perfectly documented, and that's part of its charm.

    The name "Westhaven" is widely believed to reflect the idea of a haven… a place of comfort, warmth, and familiarity.

    And that lines up exactly with the kind of cake this is.

    It's simple to make, made with pantry staples, and designed to feed a group. The dates keep it incredibly soft, the chocolate gives it richness, and that warm icing poured over the top turns it into something that feels just a little extra special without being complicated.

    This is the kind of cake that shows up at potlucks, sits on kitchen counters during family visits, and gets passed from one home cook to another.

    Not because it's trendy… but because it works.

    And because it feels like home.

    FAQs

    What is Westhaven cake?

    Westhaven cake is an old-fashioned chocolate date cake made from scratch. It's known for its soft texture, rich flavor, and warm fudge icing poured over the top.

    Can you taste the dates in Westhaven cake?

    Not strongly. The dates melt into the batter and create a deep, almost caramel-like flavor rather than a distinct fruit taste.

    Why are dates used in this cake?

    Dates add moisture and richness, giving the cake its signature soft crumb.

    Can I skip the dates?

    No, they're essential to both the texture and flavor. If you’re looking for an old-fashioned chocolate cake without dates, you can try my depression cake.

    Does the icing harden?

    It sets softly. Think more like a fudgy layer than a firm frosting.

    Can this cake be made ahead of time?

    Yes, and it's even better the next day as the flavor deepens.

    How should I store it?

    Store Westhaven Cake at room temperature for up to 2 days, in the refrigerator for 4-5 days or the freezer for 2-3 months.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Date Mixture

    • 1 cup finely chopped pitted dates - soften and melt into the cake for moisture and flavor
    • 1 cup boiling water - helps break down the dates
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda - softens the dates and creates a tender crumb

    Cake Batter

    • 1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour - provides structure
    • 1 ¾ cups granulated sugar - sweetens and balances the cocoa (you can reduce slightly if preferred)
    • ⅓ cup unsweetened cocoa powder - adds rich chocolate flavor
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder - helps the cake rise
    • ½ teaspoon salt - enhances flavor
    • 2 large eggs - bind everything together
    • ½ cup vegetable oil - keeps the cake moist
    • 1 cup buttermilk - adds tenderness and a slight tang
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract - rounds out the flavor

    Fudge Icing

    • ½ cup (1 stick) unsalted butter - creates a rich base
    • ¼ cup cocoa powder - deepens the chocolate flavor
    • ⅓ cup milk - helps create a smooth, pourable icing
    • 3 ½ cups powdered sugar - sweetens and thickens
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - adds warmth
    • Pinch of salt - balances sweetness
    • 1 cup chopped pecans (optional) - adds texture and an old-fashioned touch
    Ingredients on kitchen counter to make Westhaven Cake.

    Instructions

    • Combine the chopped dates, boiling water, and baking soda in a bowl, then let it sit for 10 to 15 minutes until softened and slightly thickened
    Dates, hot water and sugar, sitting in bowls and glasses.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F and grease a 9×13 baking dish (line with parchment if you want easier removal)
    • Whisk together the flour, sugar, cocoa powder, baking powder, and salt until evenly combined
    Flour, sugar, cocoa, baking powder and salt in clear mixing bowl.
    • Add the eggs, oil, buttermilk, and vanilla, mixing just until smooth
    eggs, oil, buttermilk, and vanilla added to chocolate cake batter for Westhaven Cake
    • Let the date mixture cool slightly so it's warm but not piping hot, then stir it into the batter
    date mixture added to chocolate cake batter for Westhaven Cake.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and spread it evenly
    Chocolate date Westhaven Cake batter poured in to 9x13 baking pan
    • Bake for 30 to 35 minutes, until the center is set and a toothpick comes out with moist crumbs (not wet batter)
    Baked Westhaven Cake in 9x13 baking pan
    • While the cake is finishing, melt the butter in a saucepan, then whisk in the cocoa powder and milk and heat just until it begins to bubble
    • Remove from heat and whisk in the powdered sugar, vanilla, and salt until smooth, then stir in pecans if using
    Cooked chocolate icing for Westhaven Cake in saucepan
    • Pour the warm icing over the warm cake and gently spread it across the top
    • Let the cake cool for about 30 to 45 minutes before slicing so the icing can set
    Nutty, chocolate stove-top icing poured and spread on top of chocolate Westhaven cake.

    Recipe Tips

    • Chop the dates small so they soften evenly
    • Don't skip the baking soda in the date mixture, it's key for texture
    • Let the date mixture cool slightly before adding to avoid affecting the batter
    • Pour icing over the cake while both are warm for that classic fudgy layer
    • If your oven runs hot, bake closer to 335-340°F to prevent overbaking
    • Pull the cake when just set, overbaking can make it dense
    a slice of chocolate date Westhaven Cake on a plate, with a fork taking a bite off of the corner.

    More Old-Fashioned Desserts to Try

    If you love simple, nostalgic desserts like this Westhaven Cake, here are a few more that bring that same old-fashioned comfort to the table:

    • No-Bake Cherry Cheesecake - A simple, creamy dessert that's been showing up at family tables for decades.
    • Old-Fashioned Bread Pudding - Warm, soft, and made with simple pantry ingredients, this is one of those desserts that feels like it came straight from grandma's kitchen.
    • Easy Dump Cake Recipes - Just layer, bake, and serve. These are some of the easiest crowd-pleasing desserts you can make for potlucks and gatherings.
    • Strawberry Jello Cake - Light, moist, and perfect for spring or summer gatherings with that familiar retro flavor everyone recognizes.

    Recipe

    A slice of Westhaven cake on a round plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Westhaven Cake Recipe

    An old-fashioned Westhaven cake made from scratch with dates and cocoa, topped with warm fudge icing that melts slightly into the cake for a soft, rich finish.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 30 minutes minutes
    Total Time 45 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 594kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Date Mixture:

    • 1 cup pitted dates finely chopped
    • 1 cup boiling water
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda

    Cake Batter:

    • 1 ¾ cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 ¾ cups granulated sugar
    • ⅓ cup unsweetened cocoa powder
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 2 large eggs
    • ½ cup vegetable oil
    • 1 cup buttermilk
    • 2 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Fudge Icing

    • ½ cup unsalted butter 1 stick, 8 tablespoons
    • ¼ cup cocoa powder
    • ⅓ cup milk
    • 3 ½ cups powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • pinch of salt
    • 1 cup pecans chopped, optional

    Instructions

    • In a small bowl, combine the chopped dates, boiling water, and baking soda. Let sit for 10 to 15 minutes until softened and slightly thickened.
    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Grease a 9×13 baking dish and line with parchment if desired.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the flour, sugar, cocoa powder, baking powder, and salt.
    • Add the eggs, oil, buttermilk, and vanilla. Mix until smooth.
    • Let the date mixture cool slightly so it's warm but not piping hot, then stir it into the batter.
    • Pour the batter into the prepared pan and spread evenly.
    • Bake for 30 to 35 minutes, or until the center is set and a toothpick inserted comes out with moist crumbs, not wet batter.

    Frosting Instructions

    • Near the end of baking, melt the butter in a saucepan over medium heat. Whisk in the cocoa powder and milk, heating just until it begins to bubble.
    • Remove from heat and whisk in powdered sugar, vanilla, and salt until smooth. Stir in pecans if using.
    • Pour the warm icing over the warm cake and gently spread.
    • Let cool for 30 to 45 minutes before slicing so the icing can set.

    Notes

    • Finely chop the dates so they soften properly and blend into the cake. Large pieces can stay firm and affect texture.
    • Let the date mixture cool slightly before adding so it doesn't affect the batter.
    • Do not skip the baking soda in the date mixture. This step is key for the soft, tender crumb.
    • Bake just until the center is set. Overbaking can make the cake dense instead of moist.
    • If your oven runs hot, reduce the temperature slightly to prevent the edges from overbaking.
    • Pour the icing over the cake while both are still warm so it melts slightly into the top.
    • This cake tastes even better the next day as the flavor deepens.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 594kcal | Carbohydrates: 92g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 8g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 262mg | Potassium: 250mg | Fiber: 4g | Sugar: 73g | Vitamin A: 326IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 77mg | Iron: 2mg

    Cowboy Pasta Salad

    April 5, 2026

    Cowboy Pasta Salad in bowl with wooden spoon.

    Cowboy pasta salad is a hearty, flavor-packed pasta salad made with smoky BBQ dressing, sausage, bacon, beans, and cheese. It's an easy, crowd-pleasing recipe that works as a side dish or a full meal.

    The Kind of Pasta Salad That Steals the Show

    This isn't one of those light, forgettable pasta salads that gets pushed to the side of the table. This is the one people go back for.

    It's bold, filling, and layered with flavor in a way that feels intentional. You've got smoky BBQ sauce, creamy dressing, crispy bacon, seasoned sausage, and just enough freshness from the vegetables to balance it out. It's the kind of dish that works just as well at a summer cookout as it does for a busy weeknight dinner when you need something already made in the fridge.

    Cowboy pasta in bowl with wooden spoon.

    And honestly, it's reliable. It holds up, it gets better as it sits, and it feeds a crowd without any stress.

    FAQs

    What is cowboy pasta salad?

    Cowboy pasta salad is a hearty pasta salad made with meat, beans, cheese, and a bold BBQ-style dressing. It's more filling than traditional pasta salad and often served as a main dish or substantial side.

    Can I make cowboy pasta salad ahead of time?

    Yes, and you should. This is one of those recipes that tastes even better after it sits for a few hours or overnight.

    How do you keep pasta salad from drying out?

    The pasta absorbs dressing as it sits. If it looks dry the next day, just stir in a little BBQ sauce or mayo to bring it back to life.

    How long does cowboy pasta salad last in the fridge?

    Stored in an airtight container, it will stay fresh for up to 4 days.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients to make cowboy pasta salad sitting on wooden table.
    • Pasta (bowtie or rotini) - Holds onto the thick dressing and all the mix-ins
    • Ground sausage - Adds rich, savory flavor and makes it feel like a full meal
    • Bacon - Brings that smoky, crispy bite that makes everything better
    • Black beans - Adds texture and helps make it hearty
    • Corn - A little sweetness that balances the BBQ flavors
    • Pepperjack cheese - Creamy with a slight kick
    • Cherry tomatoes - Freshness and acidity to cut through the richness
    • Red onion & bell pepper - Crunch and flavor contrast
    • Parsley - Brightens everything up

    For the dressing:

    • BBQ sauce - The base flavor, smoky and slightly sweet
    • Mayonnaise - Creamy and smooth
    • Worcestershire sauce - Adds depth and richness
    • Yellow mustard - Just enough tang to balance
    • Garlic powder & salt - Simple seasoning that works
    • Green chiles - Mild heat and extra flavor

    Instructions

    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the BBQ sauce, mayonnaise, Worcestershire sauce, mustard, garlic powder, salt, and green chiles until smooth. Chill until ready to use.
    Dressing ingredients in mixing bowl on wooden table.
    • In a large mixing bowl, combine the cooked and cooled pasta, sausage, bacon, black beans, corn, cheese, tomatoes, onion, bell pepper, and parsley.
    Pasta and vegetables in mixing bowl, sitting on wooden table.
    • Pour the dressing over the top.
    • Toss gently until everything is evenly coated.
    Dressing added to pasta and vegetable for pasta salad in mixing bowl.
    • Cover and refrigerate for at least an hour before serving so the flavors can come together.
    Dressing tossed with cowboy pasta salad in glass bowl.

    Tips

    • Rinse your pasta with cold water after cooking so it doesn't get sticky or overcooked
    • Let the sausage get a little crispy in the pan for better flavor
    • Drain beans and chiles really well to avoid a watery salad
    • Don't skip the chill time… it makes a big difference
    • If serving the next day, refresh with a little extra dressing before serving

    Similar Recipes

    If you love pasta salad recipes like this one, you’ll also love these reader favorites:

    • This shrimp macaroni salad takes only minutes to whip up.
    • Chicken macaroni salad is hearty enough to enjoy as a main dish.
    • Bacon ranch pasta salad is so full of flavor and a popular potluck favorite.

    Recipe

    Cowboy Pasta Salad in bowl with wooden spoon.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Cowboy Pasta Salad

    This cowboy pasta salad is a hearty BBQ pasta salad loaded with sausage, bacon, beans, and a creamy smoky dressing that makes it perfect for potlucks or easy dinners.
    Course Side Dish
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Chilling Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 1 hour hour 35 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 457kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Dressing:

    • ¾ cup spicy BBQ sauce or regular BBQ sauce
    • ½ cup mayonnaise
    • 1 tablespoon Worcestershire sauce
    • 1 tablespoon yellow mustard
    • 1 teaspoon garlic powder
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 4 ounces can green chiles

    Pasta Salad:

    • 12 ounces box bowtie or rotini pasta cooked and cooled
    • 1 pound ground sausage browned and crumbled
    • 6 strips bacon cooked and crumbled
    • 15 ounces can black beans rinsed and drained
    • 1 cup frozen corn thawed
    • 1 cup pepperjack cheese cubed
    • 1 pint cherry tomatoes halved
    • ½ red onion finely diced
    • 1 cup yellow bell pepper diced
    • ¼ cup chopped parsley plus more for optional garnish

    Instructions

    • In a medium sized bowl, whisk together the BBQ sauce, mayonnaise, worcestershire sauce, yellow mustard, garlic powder, salt, and green chiles until fully combined to create the dressing. Set aside in the refrigerator until ready to use.
    • In a very large mixing bowl, combine all of the pasta salad ingredients (cooked pasta, browned ground sausage, bacon, black beans, corn, pepperjack cheese, tomatoes, red onion, bell pepper, and parsley).
    • Pour the prepared dressing over the ingredients.
    • Toss the salad gently until everything is evenly coated in the dressing.
    • Cover the bowl and refrigerate for at least 1 hour to allow the flavors to meld before serving.

    Notes

    • Rinse the cooked pasta under cold water to stop the cooking process and prevent it from becoming sticky or gummy.
    • Let the pasta cool completely before adding the dressing so it doesn't absorb it too quickly or turn greasy.
    • Make sure the black beans and green chiles are well-drained to avoid a watery salad.
    • This salad gets better as it sits, but the pasta will absorb some of the dressing. If it seems dry the next day, stir in a little extra BBQ sauce or mayonnaise before serving.
    • Bowtie (farfalle) or rotini work best because they hold onto the thick dressing and mix-ins.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 457kcal | Carbohydrates: 41g | Protein: 17g | Fat: 25g | Saturated Fat: 8g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 7g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 47mg | Sodium: 996mg | Potassium: 521mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 8g | Vitamin A: 478IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 111mg | Iron: 2mg

    Shoofly Cake

    April 4, 2026

    A slice of shoofly cake sitting on round plate.

    Shoofly cake is a rich, old-fashioned molasses cake with a tender base and crumbly topping, baked in a simple 9×13 pan. It's a cozy, crowd-pleasing, old-fashioned dessert with deep flavor and just the right amount of spice.

    Old-Fashioned Comfort That Still Works

    This shoofly cake recipe, much like this burnt sugar cake and this Tandy cake, is one of those recipes that feels like it came straight out of a handwritten church cookbook. It's simple, dependable, and full of flavor that doesn't rely on anything fancy. The molasses gives it that deep, almost caramel-like richness, while the crumb topping adds texture that makes every bite a little different.

    Spatula holding a slice of shoofly cake above pan of cake.

    It's the kind of dessert you bring when you want people to ask, "What is this?"… and then come back for a second piece. Perfect for potlucks, holiday tables, or just a quiet night when you want something warm and nostalgic.

    FAQs

    What does shoofly cake taste like?

    It's rich, slightly dense, and full of bold molasses flavor with a warm hint of cinnamon. Think somewhere between a spice cake and a crumb cake, but deeper and more old-fashioned.

    Do I have to use dark brown sugar?

    Dark brown sugar gives the strongest molasses flavor. You can use light brown sugar, but the flavor will be more mild.

    Can I make this ahead of time?

    Yes, and honestly, it's even better the next day. The flavor deepens and the texture settles beautifully.

    Can you freeze shoofly cake?

    You can. Let it cool slightly, wrap tightly, and freeze for up to 3 months. It stays moist and thaws well.

    How should I store leftovers?

    Keep it covered at room temperature for 1-2 days or refrigerate in an airtight container for up to 5 days.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients to make Shoofly cake, sitting on counter.
    • All-purpose flour - The base of the cake and crumb topping. Sifting helps prevent clumps and keeps the texture even.
    • Dark brown sugar - Adds sweetness and deep molasses flavor that defines this cake.
    • Cinnamon - Brings a warm, cozy spice that balances the richness.
    • Salted butter - Creates that soft, crumbly topping and adds richness throughout.
    • Boiling water - Helps dissolve the molasses and activate the baking soda.
    • Molasses - The star ingredient. Bold, rich, and what gives shoofly cake its signature flavor.
    • Baking soda - Reacts with the molasses to help the cake rise properly.
    • Salt - Enhances flavor and balances the sweetness.
    • Eggs - Add structure and help bind everything together.

    Instructions

    Preheat your oven to 350°F and spray a 9×13 baking dish with nonstick spray.

    In a medium bowl, whisk together the boiling water, molasses, baking soda, and salt until smooth. Let this mixture cool for about 10 minutes so it doesn't scramble the eggs. Once cooled, whisk in the eggs until combined.

    Molasses, eggs, baking soda and salt in mixing bowl.

    In a large bowl, mix together the flour, brown sugar, and cinnamon.

    Dry ingredients to make Shoofly cake in mixing bowl.

    Add the softened butter and work it in with a fork or your hands until the mixture looks like damp sand.

    Dry mixture with softened butter, in mixing bowl.

    Set aside 2 cups of this crumb mixture for the topping.

    Add the remaining crumb mixture to the molasses mixture and stir until fully combined.

    Molasses mixture added to dry mixture in mixing bowl.

    Pour the batter into your prepared baking dish.

    Shoofly cake batter poured in to 9x13 baking pan.

    Sprinkle the reserved crumb mixture evenly over the top.

    Buttery crumb mixture poured on top of Shoofly cake batter in 9x13 pan.

    Bake uncovered for about 55 minutes, or until the center is set. If it still jiggles, give it a few more minutes so it doesn't fall as it cools.

    Baked shoofly cake in 9x13 baking dish.

    Let the cake cool completely before slicing and serving.

    Tips

    • Make sure the molasses mixture has cooled before adding eggs or you'll end up with scrambled bits
    • Don't skip sifting the flour if it's packed or clumpy
    • Sprinkle the topping evenly instead of dumping it in one spot
    • If the center looks underdone, keep baking a few extra minutes-this cake needs to be fully set
    • This cake slices best once completely cooled
    A slice of shoofly cake on a round plate.

    More Old-Fashioned Cake Recipes

    This recipe is one of the old-fashioned cake recipes that is worth bringing back to modern tables. If you love recipes like this, make sure to also try this Granny Cake Recipe and this Ugly Duckling cake recipe that are so fun on a dessert potluck table.

    Recipe

    A slice of shoofly cake sitting on round plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Shoofly Cake Recipe

    Shoofly cake is a rich molasses-based dessert with a soft cake layer and crumb topping, baked in one pan and perfect for sharing. It's simple, nostalgic, and full of bold, old-fashioned flavor.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour
    Servings 12 slices
    Calories 538kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 4 cups all-purpose flour sifted
    • 2 ¼ cups dark brown sugar
    • 2 teaspoons cinnamon
    • 1 cup salted butter 2 sticks, softened
    • 2 cups boiling water
    • 1 cup molasses
    • 2 ½ teaspoons baking soda
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 2 large eggs room temperature

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven and prepare your baking dish. Preheat to 350°F and spray a 9×13 with non-stick cooking spray.
    • Mix the wet ingredients. In a medium bowl, whisk together the boiling water, molasses, baking soda, and salt until the molasses has dissolved completely. Let it cool for about 10 minutes, then whisk in the eggs. If the molasses mix isn't cool enough, the egg will scramble, so make sure you wait. You can stick it into your refrigerator to speed up this process. While it cools, work on the next step (dry ingredients).
    • Make the dry mixture. In a large bowl, combine the flour, brown sugar, and cinnamon. Add the butter and work it into the mixture with a fork or clean hands until it resembles damp sand. Set aside.
    • Set aside the topping and combine the rest with the wet mixture. Set aside 2 cups of the flour mixture and combine the remaining mix with the molasses mixture. Stir until well combined.
    • Top with the crumble and bake. Pour the molasses mixture into the baking dish and then sprinkle the reserved flour mixture evenly over the top. Don't dump it in; sprinkle it evenly. Bake uncovered for 55 minutes or until the center is set and firm. If the center is still jiggly, pop it back in the oven or it will fall once cooled.
    • Cool and serve. Cool completely before serving.

    Notes

    • Let the molasses mixture cool before adding eggs to prevent scrambling
    • Sift flour if clumpy to avoid dry pockets in the cake
    • Bake until center is fully set (no jiggle) to prevent sinking after cooling
    • Cool completely before slicing for best texture and clean cuts

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 538kcal | Carbohydrates: 94g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 17g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 72mg | Sodium: 580mg | Potassium: 527mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 61g | Vitamin A: 520IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 112mg | Iron: 4mg

    Old-Fashioned Salmon Patties Recipe

    April 3, 2026

    Close up of cooked salmon patties on a plate, with fresh parsley sprinkled on top.

    Old-Fashioned Salmon Patties: These classic salmon patties are shallow-fried and are made with Old Bay Seasoning to kick up the flavor a bit. Ready in under an hour, and using canned salmon, these are a great weekly staple dinner recipe.

    Close up of fried salmon patties on green lettuce leaves.

    Classics are called that for a reason! Food can take us back to a time or place, and I’m hoping these salmon patties can do that for you like they do for me, sitting at my Grandma’s table. At least once a week, I’d walk in to her house and see a plate just like this (well, the green Corelle pattern instead) sitting there full of fish patties:

    Old-Fashioned salmon patties sitting on Corelle plate.

    I also love to make an old-fashioned tuna casserole or this hamburger hash brown casserole recipe on occasion. If you want to take a classic old-fashioned dish to pass at a party, nothing beats pea salad!

    Now, if you aren’t a fan of frying in oil, you can easily make Air Fryer Salmon Patties as well or even bake lemon pepper salmon.

    [feast_advanced_jump_to]

    Why You’ll Love This Recipe

    • Easy to make gluten-free: I haven’t tried it, but with so many gluten-free cracker and breadcrumb options out there, you should be able to make this fit your diet.
    • Nutritious: Fish, and salmon in particular, provides a lot of nutrients and vitamins. I love to shake up what recipe I am using!
    • Ready in only 40 minutes: Even with the required chill time, this is still a quick meal. You can also mix them up early and let them chill longer and cook quickly when the time comes.

    Ingredients Needed

    Here’s what you’ll need to make these salmon patties.

    • Salmon – Use canned salmon. You can use deboned or not, it’s up to you – often there are tiny bones that you are able to just eat for extra nutrition. You may also cook your own salmon and flake apart, but I find canned to be delicious, nutritious, and affordable.
    • Crackers – Saltines are the classic option, but breadcrumbs will also work.
    • Egg – Use one whole egg. If your mixture isn’t sticking together, you can try adding a second yolk.
    • Old Bay Seasoning – Again, this is what was always used and I still find it the best option! It adds just enough heat.
    • Mayo – This is added to help bind the patties together better. It’s an old-fashioned method that grandma used.
    • Frying oil – Vegetable oil is a great option because it has a neutral flavor and high smoke point. You can also use peanut or canola.

    *Be sure to see the recipe card below for the full ingredients list & instructions!*

    How to Make Classic Salmon Patties

    Frying was popular and made a lot of classic dishes we still eat today. I don’t mind shallow frying on occasion to achieve the perfect crispy crust!

    Process images showing the steps for making old fashioned salmon patties.

    STEP 1. Combine. Add all ingredients to a large bowl and mix well to combine.

    STEP 2. Chill. Let the bowl chill in the fridge for about 30 minutes to soak up all of the moisture.

    Cooked salmon patties on white plate, next to lemon slice.

    STEP 3. Form patties. Use your hands to gently form patties. Make sure and use enough pressure to stick everything together but not squish too tightly.

    STEP 4. Fry patties. Pour oil in pan -the amount of oil will depend on the size of you frying pan. You’ll want enough oil to cover the bottom of the pan, and come up just a tad on the sides of the patties.

    You don’t want the patties soaking in the oil. A ⅓ of an inch depth of oil, or so should be just fine.

    Fry, in batches if necessary, until golden brown on the outside and heated through.

    Recipe Pro Tips

    • Leave time to chill. The resting/chill time is essential! It allows everything to soak in the moisture so that the crackers perform their job of binding everything together.
    • Correct oil. Always use a neutral oil when frying, so it doesn’t impart any other flavors on your dish. Peanut, vegetable, and canola are all good options. Stay away from olive oil for frying.
    Salmon patties on plate lined with green lettuce leaves, with one patties cut open to see the inside.

    Recipe FAQs

    Can I make this ahead of time and freeze it?

    You can. Form the salmon mixture into patties and arrange them on a baking sheet lined with parchment paper. Freeze the patties for a couple of hours until firm. Transfer them to an airtight container and store them in the freezer. They will keep for up to 3 months. 

    When you are ready to enjoy, allow the salmon patties to thaw in the fridge and fry just as you normally would. 

    Help! My patties aren’t sticking together.

    Make sure you are letting the mixture rest and chill to allow the crackers to soak up the moisture, otherwise dry cracker crumbles will not be "sticky" enough to hold together. Also, sometimes canned salmon can have a dry texture depending on the brand you purchase. If this is the case you can add an extra egg yolk to help it form better patties. 

    Should I eat salmon patties warm or cold?

    Salmon patties are best enjoyed warm. If you find yourself with cold leftovers, refer to the “Storage” section below to learn how to reheat them properly. 

    What to Serve with Salmon Patties

    I’m always up for an amazing side salad! You can also add rolls and a veggie if you aren’t into salad, maybe some candied carrots or roasted broccoli.

    Storage

    • To store. Once the salmon patties have cooled down a bit, seal them in an airtight container. They can be kept in the refrigerator for up to 3 days or in the freezer for up to 3 months. 
    • To reheat. Thaw the salmon patties in the refrigerator and then put them in a single layer on a wire rack set over a baking sheet. Bake 350°F for 10-15 minutes or until heated through. Another great option is to reheat them in an air fryer. They maintain the same nice crispy texture in an air fryer on 370 degrees for about 3-5 minutes. You can also microwave a patty or two in 15 second intervals until heated through. 

    More Fish Recipes You’ll Love

    • Cilantro Avocado + Hummus Fish Tacos
      Fish Finger Tacos
    • Salmond slider with garlic aioli, tomato and lettuce.
      Salmon Sliders
    • Panko Crusted Cod on spatula, above a plate of food.
      Panko Crusted Cod
    • Fish sliders on white plate.
      Fish Sliders

    Did you make this? I’d be so grateful if you left a “star” rating below to let me know what you thought! Then, the next time you need a quick and easy recipe, come back to Fantabulosity to browse all of my easy recipes!

    Recipe

    Close up of cooked salmon patties on a plate, with fresh parsley sprinkled on top.
    Print Pin
    5 from 2 votes

    Old-Fashioned Salmon Patties Recipe

    Old-fashioned salmon patties made with canned salmon, crushed crackers, and simple seasonings, (and Old Bay for added flavor) that are pan-fried until crispy on the outside and tender inside.
    Course Dinner
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 16 minutes minutes
    Chill 20 minutes minutes
    Total Time 46 minutes minutes
    Servings 5 patties
    Calories 603kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 15 ounces canned salmon drained and deboned
    • ¾ cup saltine crackers crushed
    • 2 teaspoons minced garlic
    • 1 egg
    • 2 tablespoons mayonnaise
    • ¼ teaspoon pepper
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon onion powder
    • 1 teaspoon Old Bay seasoning
    • ½ tablespoon Italian seasoning
    • 1 cup vegetable oil
    • Parsley for garnish
    • Lemon for serving

    Instructions

    • Add salmon, crackers, garlic, egg, pepper, salt, onion powder, old bay, and Italian seasoning to a large mixing bowl and mix until well combined.
    • Cover the bowl of mix and place it into your refrigerator for about 20 minutes. This allows the crushed saltines to soak up the moisture and flavor and help the patties form together instead of crumble.
    • Form the salmon mixture into even-sized patties, about 2 inches wide and ½ inch thick. Place them on a plate as you make them so that you can fry them all at once or in batches.
    • Heat the oil in a large heavy-bottomed skillet over medium-high heat. Just enough to line the pan, or a thin layer of oil is needed, or about ⅓ inch of depth in the pan. This will give a crispier edge, instead of "soaking" the patty.
      Fry the salmon patties for 3-4 minutes on each side (flipping with a spatula that's wide enough to support the entire patty) and fry until they are nice and golden brown. ** See notes for tips to prevent crumbling.
      Transfer the salmon patties to a plate lined with paper towels. Do not crowd the oil. Fry in batches if needed.
    • Serve warm garnished with parsley and lemon wedges.

    Video

    Notes

    Note that the salmon patties should be nice and golden brown, before flipping, to reduce the chances of them falling apart. 
    • Nutrition information is calculated as if 2 tablespoons of oil were absorbed during cooking.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1patty | Calories: 603kcal | Carbohydrates: 9g | Protein: 22g | Fat: 54g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 29g | Monounsaturated Fat: 12g | Trans Fat: 0.4g | Cholesterol: 106mg | Sodium: 588mg | Potassium: 332mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 0.3g | Vitamin A: 126IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 264mg | Iron: 2mg

    Lemon Blueberry Bread

    April 2, 2026

    Sliced lemon blueberry bread with lemon glaze.

    Lemon Blueberry Bread is a soft, moist quick bread packed with fresh lemon flavor and bursts of juicy blueberries. It's an easy, no-fuss loaf that feels a little special but comes together fast, like a lot of my bread recipes.

    A Bright, Bakery-Style Loaf That Actually Works at Home

    This is the kind of recipe you make once and keep coming back to, much like the best banana bread recipe. The crumb is tender but not overly delicate, the lemon flavor comes through without being sharp, and the blueberries stay evenly distributed instead of sinking to the bottom. It's reliable for brunch, gifting, or just having something homemade on the counter that feels a little elevated without extra work.

    Sliced lemon blueberry bread, with lemon glaze.

    FAQs

    Can I use frozen blueberries?

    Yes. Add them straight from the freezer and toss them in flour before folding into the batter. Do not thaw.

    Why did my blueberries sink?

    A little sinking is normal in a moist quick bread. Tossing them in flour helps suspend them more evenly throughout the loaf.

    Can I make this ahead of time?

    Yes, and it's actually better the next day. The lemon flavor deepens and the texture settles nicely.

    Do I have to add the glaze?

    No, but it adds a soft lemon finish that makes it feel more complete. The bread itself is still delicious without it.

    Can I freeze lemon blueberry bread?

    Yes. Freeze it unglazed, wrapped tightly, for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight and glaze before serving.

    How should I store leftovers?

    Wrap tightly and keep at room temperature for up to 2 days, or refrigerate for up to 5 days.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Ingredients to make lemon blueberry bread, sitting on counter.
    • All-purpose flour - Gives the bread structure while keeping the crumb soft and tender.
    • Granulated sugar - Adds sweetness and helps create that lightly golden crust.
    • Baking powder - The lift that keeps the loaf from feeling dense.
    • Fine salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances the lemon flavor.
    • Lemon zest - Where most of the real lemon flavor comes from. Fresh zest makes a big difference here.
    • Plain Greek yogurt - Adds moisture and richness without making the bread heavy.
    • Canola oil - Keeps the loaf soft even after it cools.
    • Eggs - Bind everything together and give structure.
    • Fresh lemon juice - Brightens the flavor and balances the sweetness.
    • Vanilla extract - Rounds out the flavor so it doesn't taste overly sharp.
    • Fresh blueberries - Juicy pockets of sweetness throughout the bread.
    • Flour (for tossing blueberries) - Helps keep them from sinking.

    Lemon Glaze

    • Powdered sugar - Creates a smooth, pourable glaze.
    • Fresh lemon juice - Adds brightness and thins the glaze.
    • Lemon zest - Boosts the lemon flavor right on top.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven to 350°F. Grease a 9×5-inch loaf pan and line it with parchment paper, leaving an overhang for easy removal.

    In a large bowl, whisk together the flour, sugar, baking powder, salt, and lemon zest until evenly combined.

    Dry ingredients and lemon zest in mixing bowl with whisk.

    In a separate bowl, whisk the Greek yogurt, oil, eggs, lemon juice, and vanilla until smooth.

    Eggs, yogurt and oil in clear mixing bowl with whisk.

    Pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients and gently fold until just combined. The batter will be thick, and that's exactly what you want. Avoid overmixing.

    Wet ingredients added to dry ingredients in clear mixing bowl.

    Toss the blueberries with a tablespoon of flour.

    Blueberries tossed in flour, in mixing bowl.

    Then, gently fold the blueberries into the batter.

    Blueberries mixed in to lemon blueberry bread batter in mixing bowl.

    Pour the batter into the prepared pan and smooth the top. Bake for 50 to 60 minutes, until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.

    Lemon blueberry bread batter in loaf pan.

    Let the loaf rest in the pan for about 10 minutes, then lift it out using the parchment and cool completely on a wire rack.

    Baked lemon blueberry bread cooling on wire rack.

    For the glaze, whisk the powdered sugar, lemon juice, and zest until smooth. Adjust consistency with small amounts of lemon juice if needed.

    Powdered sugar, lemon juice and lemon zest.

    Drizzle over the cooled loaf and let it set before slicing.

    Lemon glazed blueberry lemon bread on wooden cutting board.

    Tips

    • Don't overmix once the wet and dry ingredients are combined or the bread can turn dense.
    • Tossing the blueberries in flour really does help keep them from sinking.
    • If using frozen blueberries, fold them in quickly so they don't bleed into the batter.
    • For stronger lemon flavor, brush the warm loaf with a little lemon juice before glazing.
    • Let the bread cool completely before slicing so it holds together cleanly.

    More Recipes You’ll Love

    If you love the bright flavors of lemon and blueberry, you’ll also love these recipes, using lemons and blueberries:

    • This lemon puppy chow is a fresh spin on the traditional muddy buddies. White chocolate and lemon juice come together for a burst of flavor.
    • If you have extra blueberries sitting around, this blueberry skillet cobbler is such a great idea since it uses simple ingredients that you may even have on hand already.

    Recipe

    Sliced lemon blueberry bread with lemon glaze.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Lemon Blueberry Bread

    This lemon blueberry bread is soft, moist, and packed with fresh lemon flavor and juicy blueberries, finished with a simple glaze that makes it feel bakery-worthy.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 50 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 5 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 262kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 ½ cups all-purpose flour
    • ¾ cup granulated sugar
    • 2 teaspoons baking powder
    • ¼ teaspoon fine salt
    • Zest of 2 lemons
    • ½ cup plain Greek yogurt
    • ⅓ cup canola oil
    • 2 large eggs room temperature
    • ¼ cup fresh lemon juice
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 ¼ cups fresh blueberries
    • 1 tablespoon all-purpose flour

    Lemon Glaze

    • ¾ cup powdered sugar
    • 1 ½ tablespoons fresh lemon juice
    • ½ teaspoon lemon zest

    Instructions

    • Pre-heat the oven to 350°F. Grease a 9×5-inch loaf pan and line it with parchment paper. Ensure that you leave an overhang for easy removal.
    • In a large bowl, whisk together the flour, sugar, baking powder, salt, and lemon zest until well combined.
    • In a separate bowl, whisk yogurt, oil, eggs, lemon juice, and vanilla until smooth.
    • Pour the wet mixture into the dry mixture and fold gently until it is just combined. Don't overmix. The batter will be thick.
    • Toss blueberries with 1 tablespoon of flour, then gently fold them into the batter.
    • Pour batter into the prepared pan and smooth the top. Bake for 50-60 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    • Let the loaf rest in the pan for 10 minutes, then lift it out of the pan and cool completely on a wire rack.

    For the Lemon Glaze

    • Whisk the powdered sugar, lemon juice, and zest until smooth. If your glaze is too thick, add ½ teaspoon of lemon juice at a time.
      Start with ½ tablespoon at a time to make sure I get the right consistency of glaze. Drizzle over the cooled loaf and let it set before slicing.

    Notes

    You can use frozen blueberries for this recipe. Make sure to add them straight from the freezer to the mixture. Do not thaw them.
    For an extra lemon flavor, brush the warm loaf with 1-2 tablespoons of lemon juice before adding the glaze once it cools.
    Store leftover bread wrapped tightly and at room temperature for up to 2 days or refrigerate up to 5 days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 262kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.03g | Cholesterol: 33mg | Sodium: 160mg | Potassium: 71mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 26g | Vitamin A: 59IU | Vitamin C: 5mg | Calcium: 68mg | Iron: 1mg

    Old-Fashioned Cakes That Still Show Up at Every Potluck

    March 28, 2026

    Old fashioned potluck cake recipes collage.

    There are just certain cakes you expect to see at a potluck. The ones that always seem to be sitting on a folding table in a 9×13 pan, already halfway gone before you even grab a plate.

    Old-Fashioned Potluck Cake Recipes in a collage.

    They're not fancy. Nobody's decorating them with perfect swirls or stacking layers a mile high. But somehow, they're the ones people go back for seconds of… and then ask, "Who made this?"

    These are those kinds of cakes.

    These old-fashioned cake recipes are the kind that have been passed down for generations and still show up at gatherings today.

    If you love old-fashioned cakes like these, you might also enjoy these easy dump cake recipes. dump cake recipes.

    The Kind of Cakes That Never Needed Fancy

    A lot of these recipes have been around for years, and honestly, they haven't needed much updating.

    They're simple, they use ingredients you probably already have, and they don't take a ton of effort. But they work. Every time.

    That's part of the charm, I think. You don't have to overthink them, and they still turn out like something people remember.

    Old-Fashioned Cakes Worth Making Again

    These are some of my favorites that fit right into that old-fashioned, potluck-style category.

    Strawberry Jello Cake

    A slice of strawberry jello cake, topped with a strawberry, sitting on a round plate.

    This is one of those cakes that always gets attention. It's bright, super moist, and just a little different than the usual sheet cake, in the best way.

    Try this strawberry jello cake recipe for an easy dessert everyone loves.


    Granny Cake

    One slice of granny cake sitting on plate, showing topping and moist cake.

    If there was ever a cake that felt like it came straight from a handwritten recipe card, this is it. It's simple, rich, and always one of the first to disappear.

    Try this granny cake recipe for a rich, old-fashioned dessert that's always a hit at potlucks.


    Ugly Duckling Cake

    fruit cocktail cake with coconut

    The name alone gets people talking, but once they try it, they get it. It's easy, no-fuss, and somehow better than you expect it to be.

    Try this ugly duckling cake recipe for an easy, no-fuss dessert that always surprises people.


    Pineapple Sunshine Cake

    slice of pineapple cake on white plate

    This pineapple sunshine cake is light, sweet, and one of those recipes…

    Try this pineapple sunshine cake recipe for a light, fluffy dessert that's perfect for spring and summer.


    Westhaven Cake

    a slice of chocolate date Westhaven Cake on a plate, with a fork taking a bite off of the corner.

    Westhaven Cake is an old-fashioned chocolate prune cake made in a 9×13 baking pan, and topped with a fudgy icing.

    Try this Westhaven Cake recipe for an old-fashioned, church potluck dessert that everyone will love.


    Pumpkin Dump Cake

    Pumpkin Dump Cake serving on round plate.

    This is the kind of dessert people love because it's so simple. You don't need anything fancy, and it still turns out really good every time.

    Try this pumpkin dump cake recipe for a simple fall dessert that comes together with almost no effort.


    Depression Cake

    Slice of depression cake on white plate.

    This is one of those classic recipes that has been around for generations. Made without eggs, milk, or butter, it came from a time when people had to make do with what they had, and somehow, it still turns out rich and delicious.

    Try this depression cake recipe for a simple, old-fashioned dessert that's surprisingly good.


    Applesauce Crumb Cake

    Applesauce crumb cake sliced in baking pan.

    Soft, lightly spiced, and topped with that crumb layer that everyone picks at first, this one feels like it came straight out of a church cookbook.

    Try this applesauce crumb cake recipe for a soft, lightly spiced dessert with the perfect crumb topping.


    Why These Cakes Still Work

    I think the reason these cakes have stuck around is pretty simple.

    They're easy.
    They're dependable.
    And they taste like something you've had before, even if you can't quite place where.

    They don't rely on trends or anything complicated. They're just good, solid recipes that people keep making because they know they'll turn out.


    If You're Craving That Old-Fashioned Feel…

    These are a good place to start.

    Whether you're taking something to a gathering or just want a dessert that feels a little more familiar and low-key, these are the kinds of recipes that don't let you down.

    And chances are, if you bring one of these somewhere, someone's going to ask you for the recipe before you leave.

    More Old-Fashioned Desserts to Try

    If you love simple, old-fashioned desserts like these, here are a few more favorites that are just as easy and just as loved.

    Bread Pudding

    Bread pudding in 8x8 baking dish.

    Try this bread pudding recipe for a warm, classic dessert that's always a favorite.

    This bread pudding recipe is soft, warm, and one of those classic desserts that never goes out of style.


    Vanilla Sauce

    Vanilla sauce drizzled on to a serving of bread pudding in a white dish.

    This vanilla sauce is perfect for drizzling over cakes and bread pudding, and it comes together in just a few minutes.


    Homemade Brownies with Cream Cheese Frosting

    Sliced brownies with cream cheese frosting on counter.

    This easy homemade brownies recipe, is another great option when you want something simple that everyone will enjoy.

    Coconut Poke Cake Recipe

    March 25, 2026

    A slice of coconut poke cake on a spatula.

    Coconut Cream Poke Cake is a soft, fluffy 9×13 dessert soaked with a rich coconut mixture (coconut milk and sweetened condensed milk) and topped with whipped topping and toasted coconut. It's an easy, no-fuss cake that stays incredibly moist and is perfect for potlucks, holidays, or anytime you need a reliable crowd-pleaser.

    A Bakery-Style Coconut Cake That's Surprisingly Easy

    This is one of those cakes that feels a little special without requiring anything complicated. The texture is what makes it stand out. That coconut soak settles into every bite so you don't end up with dry cake anywhere, and the chilled topping keeps it light instead of heavy.

    It's the kind of dessert that works just as well for Easter or summer gatherings as it does for a simple Sunday dinner. And if you've ever had a poke cake that turned out soggy or uneven, this one fixes that with a balanced soak and the right timing.

    FAQs

    What is cream of coconut?

    Cream of coconut is thick, sweet, and syrupy. It's usually found near drink mixers. It's not the same as coconut milk or coconut cream, and swapping those will change the flavor and texture.

    Can you make coconut poke cake ahead of time?

    Yes, and it's actually better that way. Making it the day before gives the coconut mixture time to fully soak in and set.

    Does coconut have to be toasted for this coconut cake?

    You don't have to, but it makes a big difference. Toasting adds flavor and gives a slight crunch that balances the soft cake.

    How do I store coconut poke cake?

    Keep it covered in the refrigerator for up to 4 days. Serve it cold straight from the fridge.

    Can this be frozen?

    It can be frozen, but the texture of the whipped topping may change slightly. If freezing, do so before adding the topping for best results.

    Ingredients

    See the recipe card below that has the printable, full ingredient list and instructions.

    Cake

    • White cake mix (15.25 ounce box) - A light, neutral base that lets the coconut flavor shine
    • Egg whites, oil, and water (from box instructions) - Creates a soft, fluffy texture without heaviness

    Coconut Soak

    • Cream of coconut (15 ounce can) - The key ingredient that makes the cake rich, sweet, and ultra moist
    • Sweetened condensed milk (½ cup) - Adds sweetness and helps create that creamy texture throughout
    • Vanilla extract (1 teaspoon) - Rounds out the flavor and keeps it from tasting one-note

    Topping

    • Cool Whip (8 ounce, thawed) - Light and airy, balances the richness of the soak
    • Sweetened shredded coconut (1 cup, toasted) - Adds texture and a deeper coconut flavor
    Ingredients to make coconut poke cake on counter.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven according to the cake mix directions and grease a 9×13 baking dish.

    Prepare the cake mix using the egg whites, oil, and water listed on the box. Pour the batter into the pan and bake until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.

    White cake batter in 9x13 baking dish.

    Let the cake cool for about 10 to 15 minutes. It should still be slightly warm when you move to the next step.

    Baked white cake in 9x13 baking dish.

    In a bowl, whisk together the cream of coconut, sweetened condensed milk, and vanilla until smooth.

    Cream of coconut, and sweetened condensed milk in mixing bowl.

    Use the handle of a wooden spoon or a large straw to poke holes all over the cake, spacing them about an inch apart. Go deep, but not all the way through.

    Poking holes in white baked cake.

    Slowly pour the coconut mixture over the cake, letting it soak into the holes. Don't rush this step or it will sit on top instead of absorbing.

    Cream of coconut and sweetened condensed milk poured over baked cake.

    Let the cake cool completely, then cover and refrigerate for at least 2 to 3 hours, or overnight for best results.

    Spread the thawed whipped topping evenly over the chilled cake.

    Frosting spread on top of coconut poke cake.

    Sprinkle the toasted coconut over the top and serve cold.

    Toasted coconut on coconut poke cake.

    Tips

    • Use cream of coconut, not coconut milk. This is what gives the cake its signature flavor
    • Poke the cake while it's still slightly warm so it absorbs evenly
    • Pour the coconut mixture slowly so it soaks in instead of pooling
    • Chill long enough. This is what sets the texture and makes slicing clean
    Sliced coconut poke cake in 9x13 baking dish.

    More Coconut Recipes

    • Coconut Cheesecake
    • Coconut Sheet Cake
    • Pina Colada Cake
    • Ugly Duckling Cake

    Recipe

    A slice of coconut poke cake on a spatula.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Coconut Poke Cake

    This Coconut Cream Poke Cake is a light, ultra-moist dessert soaked with a sweet coconut mixture and topped with fluffy whipped topping and toasted coconut for the perfect balance of texture and flavor.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 15 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 28 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 43 minutes minutes
    Servings 15 servings
    Calories 327kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Cake

    • 15.25 ounces white cake mix
    • plus ingredients listed on the box: usually egg whites, oil, and water

    Coconut Soak

    • 15 ounce

      can cream of coconut, well stirred


    • ½ cup

      sweetened condensed milk


    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Topping

    • 8 ounces whipped topping like Cool Whip, thawed
    • 1 cup sweetened shredded coconut toasted

    Instructions

    For the cake

    • Preheat the oven according to the cake mix package directions. Grease a 9×13-inch baking dish.
    • Prepare the white cake mix according to package instructions. Pour the batter into the prepared pan and bake for 28-32 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
    • Let the cake cool for about 10-15 minutes after removing it from the oven. The cake should still be warm when you poke it.

    For the coconut soak

    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the cream of coconut, sweetened condensed milk, and vanilla extract until smooth and fully combined.
    • Using the handle of a wooden spoon or a large straw, poke holes all over the warm cake, spacing them about 1 inch apart. Make sure to poke almost to the bottom without going through the cake completely.
    • Slowly pour the coconut mixture evenly over the cake, allowing it to soak into the holes. Take your time so it absorbs instead of pooling on top.
    • Let the cake cool completely, then cover and refrigerate for at least 2-3 hours (overnight is even better).

    Toast the coconut

    • Spread the shredded coconut in an even layer on a baking sheet.
    • Bake at 325°F for 5-8 minutes, stirring every 2 minutes, until golden brown. Watch carefully, it can burn quickly.
    • Let cool completely before using.

    Add the topping

    • Once the cake is fully chilled, spread the thawed Cool Whip evenly over the top.
    • Sprinkle the toasted coconut generously over the whipped topping.
    • Slice and serve cold for the best texture.

    Notes

    Use cream of coconut, not coconut milk or cream. Cream of coconut is thick and sweet, which gives this cake its signature flavor and moisture.
    Poke while warm. The cake absorbs the coconut mixture best when it’s still slightly warm but not hot.
    Pour slowly. Let the liquid soak in gradually rather than flooding the surface.
    Chill thoroughly. This step is essential for the flavors to develop and for clean slices. Overnight chilling gives the best texture.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 327kcal | Carbohydrates: 55g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 11g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 0.2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 4mg | Sodium: 253mg | Potassium: 92mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 43g | Vitamin A: 38IU | Vitamin C: 0.3mg | Calcium: 104mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Heaven

    March 24, 2026

    A slice of strawberry heaven cake dessert on a plate.

    Strawberry Heaven is an easy no-bake strawberry dessert made with layers of angel food cake, vanilla pudding, and strawberry filling. It's light, creamy, and perfect for potlucks, holidays, or when you need something simple that everyone will love.

    A No-Bake Strawberry Dessert That Always Gets Requested

    This is one of those desserts that looks like you spent all afternoon making it, but it comes together with simple ingredients and easy layering. The angel food cake softens just enough as it chills, soaking up the pudding and strawberry filling without turning mushy.

    It's similar to a strawberry trifle or layered dessert, but even easier to make with ingredients you can grab at any store. The homemade whipped cream keeps it light and fluffy, while the strawberry layers bring that classic, sweet, nostalgic flavor everyone loves. In this strawberry cheesecake poke cake, nostalgia is mixed with decadent creaminess, with the addition of cream cheese. It’s also a luscious and sweet option.

    A slice of strawberry heaven cake on a plate.

    This is the kind of dessert that disappears fast at potlucks, family dinners, and summer get-togethers. And once people try it, they'll ask you for the recipe every time.

    What is Strawberry Heaven?

    Strawberry Heaven is a layered no-bake dessert made with cubes of angel food cake, vanilla pudding, strawberry pie filling, and whipped cream. It's often compared to a strawberry trifle, but it's quicker to assemble and doesn't require any baking.

    FAQs

    Do I have to use angel food cake?

    Angel food cake gives this dessert its light, airy texture. You can swap in pound cake if you want something richer, but it will feel heavier.

    Can I make this ahead of time?

    Yes, and it actually gets better as it chills. You can make it up to 24 hours in advance.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Cover and refrigerate for up to 3 days. It's best within the first 24 hours for the best texture.

    Can I freeze Strawberry Heaven?

    No, freezing isn't recommended. The whipped cream and pudding can separate and become watery once thawed.

    Can I use Cool Whip instead of homemade whipped cream?

    You can, and it works just fine for convenience. But homemade whipped cream gives a better flavor and texture.

    How do I keep it from getting soggy?

    Make sure the pudding is thickened before layering, don't overdo the pie filling, and chill it properly before serving.

    Ingredients

    You only need a handful of simple ingredients to make this no-bake strawberry dessert, and most of them are easy shortcuts that save time.

    • 1 prebaked angel food cake, cut into 1-inch cubes
      Creates a light, airy base that soaks up all the flavor.
    • 1 (5.1 oz) instant vanilla pudding mix
      Adds a creamy layer that holds everything together.
    • 2½ cups 2% milk
      Helps the pudding set thick and smooth.
    • 2 (21 oz) cans strawberry pie filling
      Brings bold strawberry flavor and that classic glossy texture.
    • 2 cups heavy cream
      Whipped to create a light, fluffy topping.
    • ½ cup powdered sugar
      Sweetens the whipped cream without making it grainy.
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
      Adds warmth and depth to the whipped cream.
    • 1 cup chopped fresh strawberries (optional)
      Adds fresh texture and extra strawberry flavor.
    • ¼ cup toasted sliced almonds (optional)
      Gives a little crunch to balance the creamy layers.
    Ingredients to make strawberry heaven, sitting on counter.

    Instructions

    Cut the angel food cake into 1-inch cubes and set aside.

    In a medium bowl, whisk together the pudding mix and cold milk for about 2 minutes until smooth and thickened. Place it in the refrigerator to set while preparing the rest.

    Vanilla pudding mixed in mixing bowl.

    In a large bowl, beat the heavy cream, powdered sugar, and vanilla extract with an electric mixer until medium to medium-stiff peaks form. Refrigerate until ready to use.

    Heavy cream and powdered sugar in mixing bowl.

    Spread half of the cake cubes evenly into the bottom of a 9×13 dish.

    Angel food cake cubed up in 9x13 baking dish.

    Layer half of the pudding over the cake, then add about one-third of the strawberry pie filling.

    Pudding poured on top of angel food cake cubes.

    Repeat the layers with the remaining cake, pudding, and another third of the pie filling.

    Strawberry pie filling spread on top of pudding and angel food cake cubes.

    Spread the whipped cream over the top.

    Whipped cream spread on top of strawberry pie filling and angel food cake.

    Add the remaining strawberry pie filling in dollops across the top, then use a knife or skewer to gently swirl it for a marbled look.

    Strawberry pie filling swirled on top of whipped cream in 9x13 baking dish.

    Sprinkle with toasted almonds and fresh strawberries if using.

    Sliced toasted almonds on top of strawberry heaven.

    Cover and refrigerate for at least 2 hours, or until chilled and set.

    Scoop or slice and serve cold.

    A slice of strawberry heaven on a spatula.

    Tips

    • Use cold milk and cold cream so everything thickens and whips properly
    • Let the pudding set before layering so it holds its shape
    • Stop whipping the cream at medium-stiff peaks so it stays light and spreadable
    • Don't overload the layers with pie filling or it can get too soft
    • Chill long enough so the layers settle and slice cleanly

    More Strawberry Recipes

    If you love anything strawberry like I do, then you’ll also love these strawberry recipes:

    • Strawberry Brownies
    • Strawberry Whipped Cream Cake
    • Strawberry Crunch Cake
    • Strawberry Cake Mix Cookies

    Recipe

    A slice of strawberry heaven cake dessert on a plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Heaven

    Strawberry Heaven is an easy no-bake strawberry dessert made with angel food cake, pudding, and strawberry filling for a light, creamy treat that's perfect for sharing.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Chilling Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 379kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 1 prebaked angel food cake cut into 1 inch cubes
    • 5.1 ounces instant vanilla pudding
    • 2 ½ cups 2% milk
    • 2, 21 ounces can strawberry pie filling
    • 2 cups heavy cream
    • ½ cup powdered sugar
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    • 1 cup chopped fresh strawberries optional
    • ¼ cup toasted almond slices optional

    Instructions

    • Cut the premade angel food cake into 1 inch cubes. Set aside.
    • In a medium bowl, whisk together the instant pudding mix and cold milk for about 2 minutes until smooth and thickened. Transfer to the fridge while preparing the remaining ingredients.
    • In a large mixing bowl, beat the heavy cream, powdered sugar, and vanilla extract with an electric mixer on medium speed until medium to medium-stiff peaks form. Set aside in the refrigerator until ready to assemble.
    • Spread half of the angel food cake cubes in the bottom of a 9×13 dish.
    • Add half of the vanilla pudding over the cubes then ⅓ of the strawberry pie filling over the pudding.
    • Repeat the layers with the remaining angel food cake cubes, vanilla pudding, and ⅓ strawberry pie filling.
    • Top the final layer with whipped cream and add the remaining strawberry pie filling in 6-8 dollops. Using a chopstick swirl the strawberry pie filling in so it's marbled on top.
    • Top with toasted sliced almonds (optional) and freshly chopped strawberries (also optional).
    • Cover and refrigerate for at least 2 hours (or up to overnight) to allow the flavors to meld and the cake to soften slightly.
    • Slice or scoop and serve this dish chilled. Garnish with more fresh strawberries, extra whipped cream, or more toasted almonds.

    Notes

    This recipe uses 2 cans of strawberry pie filling to add more strawberry flavor to the dish. You can stick to 1 can of pie filling – If so, do not add any pie filling to the top so you have enough to add into the layers. You may want to add more fresh strawberries to the pie filling if you want more strawberry pieces.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 379kcal | Carbohydrates: 53g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 10g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 51mg | Sodium: 264mg | Potassium: 174mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 39g | Vitamin A: 667IU | Vitamin C: 19mg | Calcium: 128mg | Iron: 0.4mg

    Strawberry Pound Cake with Strawberry Glaze Icing

    March 23, 2026

    Strawberry Pound Cake on cake stand.

    Strawberry Pound Cake is a rich, buttery cake loaded with real strawberries and finished with a naturally pink strawberry glaze. It's a classic pound cake with a fresh, slightly nostalgic twist that works for spring, summer, or anytime you want something a little special.

    A Classic Pound Cake with Real Strawberry Flavor

    This is the kind of cake that feels dependable the moment you start making it. It has that traditional pound cake texture, that’s dense but soft, rich without being heavy but the strawberries bring in just enough freshness to keep it from feeling overly sweet.

    What makes this one stand out is that it uses both fresh strawberries and freeze-dried strawberries. The fresh berries give you soft, juicy bites throughout the cake, while the freeze-dried strawberries concentrate the flavor into the glaze so it actually tastes like strawberries, not just sugar.

    Strawberry pound cake on cake stand.

    It's the kind of cake you can serve for guests, take to a gathering, or slice and enjoy with coffee in the afternoon.

    FAQs

    How should strawberry pound cake be stored?

    Store the cake covered or in an airtight container at room temperature for 2-3 days, or refrigerate for 4-5 days. For longer storage, freeze for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator or at room temperature before serving.

    How to grease a bundt cake pan?

    You have a few options, but not all are equal. Nonstick spray works, but it doesn't always reach every curve of a Bundt pan. A baking spray that includes flour is a better option.
    Oils like olive or avocado oil can work if spread evenly with a paper towel. The most reliable method is softened butter with a light coating of flour, this gives you the best release.

    Is the icing supposed to fully cover the cake on a bundt cake?

    No, this is more of a glaze than a frosting. You pour it over the top and let it run down the sides. It's not meant to fully cover the cake.

    How do I know the cake is cool enough to glaze?

    Touch the surface. If it feels completely cool with no warmth, it's ready. If the cake is still warm, the glaze will soak in instead of sitting on top.

    Ingredients

    You can also find the full, printable, recipe card below that lists the ingredients and instructions all in one place.

    • 3 cups all-purpose flour - Gives the cake its structure and classic pound cake texture
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder - Adds a slight lift so the cake isn't overly dense
    • ½ teaspoon salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances flavor
    • 1½ cups unsalted butter, room temperature - Creates that rich, buttery base pound cake is known for
    • 3 cups granulated sugar - Sweetens and helps create a tender crumb
    • 5 large eggs - Provide structure and richness
    • 1 cup milk - Keeps the batter smooth and moist
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract - Adds warmth and depth of flavor
    • 1 cup diced strawberries - Brings fresh, juicy strawberry flavor throughout the cake
    • ½ cup freeze-dried strawberries - Used for a concentrated strawberry glaze
    • 1 cup powdered sugar - Sweetens and thickens the glaze
    • 3-5 tablespoons heavy cream - Helps create a smooth, pourable glaze
    Ingredients to make strawberry pound cake on counter.

    What substitutions can I make?

    • All-purpose flour: Use a 1:1 gluten-free flour blend. Add 1 extra egg or ¼ cup buttermilk for better texture.
    • Unsalted butter: If using salted butter, reduce the salt to ¼ teaspoon.
    • Milk: Buttermilk works well for a slightly richer flavor.
    • Vanilla extract: Homemade vanilla can be used.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven to 350°F. Grease and flour a Bundt pan so the cake releases easily after baking.

    In a medium bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder, and salt.

    Flour, baking powder and salt in mixing bowl.

    In a large mixing bowl, cream the butter and sugar together until light and fluffy. This takes about 4 to 6 minutes and is key for getting the right texture.

    Butter and sugar in mixing bowl.

    Add the eggs one at a time, mixing well after each addition. Stir in the vanilla extract.

    Eggs added to butter and sugar mixture in mixing bowl.

    Alternate adding the flour mixture and the milk, mixing just until combined. Do not overmix.

    Dry ingredients added to wet ingredients in mixing bowl.

    Fold in the diced strawberries, making sure they're evenly distributed throughout the batter.

    Fresh strawberries, chopped and added to pound cake batter in mixing bowl.

    Pour the batter into the prepared Bundt pan and bake for 60 to 80 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.

    Strawberry pound cake batter poured in to bundt pan.

    Let the cake cool in the pan for 5 to 10 minutes, then transfer it to a cooling rack. Allow it to cool completely before adding the glaze.

    Baked strawberry pound cake in bundt pan.

    To make the glaze, pulse the freeze-dried strawberries in a food processor until they form a fine powder. In a bowl, whisk together the strawberry powder and powdered sugar.

    Powdered sugar, freeze-dried strawberries in mixing bowl, for pound cake icing.

    Add the heavy cream one tablespoon at a time until the glaze is smooth and slightly thick.

    Strawberry glaze in mixing bowl for pound cake.

    Pour the glaze over the cooled cake, letting it naturally run down the sides.

    Strawberry glaze, poured on top of strawberry pound cake.

    Tips

    • Make sure your butter is fully room temperature so it creams properly with the sugar
    • Don't skip greasing and flouring the Bundt pan. This cake is rich and can stick easily
    • Toss diced strawberries lightly in flour before folding in to help prevent sinking
    • Let the cake cool completely before glazing or the glaze will absorb instead of setting
    • Use freeze-dried strawberries for the glaze! Fresh strawberries won't give the same flavor or texture
    Strawberry pound cake with strawberry icing, sitting on cake stand.

    Related Recipes

    If you love beautiful, strawberry recipes like this one, you’ll also love these strawberry favorites:

    • These Strawberry Brownies start with a strawberry cake mix along with a few simple ingredients for the quickest dessert ever.
    • Strawberry Whipped Cream Cake is a sheet cake filled with a creamy, milky filling, and topped with homemade whipped cream and fresh strawberries.
    • Strawberry Crunch Cake is made with a boxed strawberry cake mix, a buttercream frosting, and a strawberry crunch top!
    • Strawberry Sweet Rolls are cinnamon rolls with fresh strawberries in the filling.
    • Strawberry brownies on white marble cutting board.
      Strawberry Brownies Recipe
    • Slice of Strawberry Whipped Cream Cake on round plate, next to a sliced strawberry.
      Strawberry Whipped Cream Cake
    • Slice of strawberry cake on white plate with fresh strawberries on top.
      Strawberry Crunch Cake
    • Baking pan of strawberry cinnamon rolls.
      Strawberry Sweet Rolls

    Recipe

    Strawberry Pound Cake on cake stand.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Pound Cake

    This Strawberry Pound Cake is a rich, buttery Bundt cake filled with fresh strawberries and topped with a naturally flavored strawberry glaze for a classic dessert with a fresh twist.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 1 hour hour
    Cooling Time 1 hour hour
    Total Time 2 hours hours 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 slices
    Calories 965kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 3 cups all-purpose flour
    • 1 teaspoon baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 ½ cups unsalted butter room temperature
    • 3 cups granulated sugar
    • 5 large eggs
    • 1 cup milk
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 cup diced strawberries
    • ½ cup freeze-dried strawberries
    • 1 cup powdered sugar
    • 3-5 tablespoons heavy cream

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Grease and flour a Bundt pan.
    • In a medium mixing bowl, whisk together the all-purpose flour, baking powder, and salt.
    • In the bowl of your mixer, cream the butter and sugar until light and fluffy, about 4 to 6 minutes. Slowly add the eggs one at a time, mixing well after each addition. Add vanilla extract.
    • Alternately mix in the flour mixture and milk until just combined. Fold in the diced strawberries until evenly distributed.
    • Bake for 60 to 80 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.
    • Let the cake cool in the pan for 5 to 10 minutes, then transfer it to a cooling rack. Allow it to cool completely.

    For the Strawberry Icing Glaze

    • In a food processor or blender, pulse freeze-dried strawberries until pulverized into a powder. Transfer the strawberry powder to a large mixing bowl with the powdered sugar. Gradually whisk in 1 tablespoon of heavy cream at a time until the glaze is smooth and slightly thickened.
    • Pour the strawberry glaze over the cooled Bundt cake and enjoy.

    Notes

    • Make sure your butter is fully room temperature so it creams properly with the sugar
    • Don't skip greasing and flouring the Bundt pan. This cake is rich and can stick easily
    • Toss diced strawberries lightly in flour before folding in to help prevent sinking
    • Let the cake cool completely before glazing or the glaze will absorb instead of setting
    • Use freeze-dried strawberries for the glaze! Fresh strawberries won't give the same flavor or texture

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 965kcal | Carbohydrates: 142g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 25g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 204mg | Sodium: 257mg | Potassium: 377mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 102g | Vitamin A: 1347IU | Vitamin C: 191mg | Calcium: 110mg | Iron: 6mg

    How to Cook Pork Chops in the Oven (Bone-In & Boneless Guide)

    March 18, 2026

    A sliced, boneless pork chop that was baked in the oven, sitting on a plate.

    Cooking pork chops in the oven is one of the easiest ways to get juicy, flavorful results every time. Whether you're using bone-in or boneless chops, this simple method works for busy weeknights or Sunday supper.

    The No-Stress Way to Make Juicy Pork Chops

    If you've ever pulled dry, tough pork chops out of the oven, you're not alone. Pork is lean, and it overcooks quickly. The good news is that once you understand temperature and timing, oven-baked pork chops become one of the most reliable dinners you can make.

    Baked boneless pork chop, sliced to show middle, sitting on a plate.

    After testing different temperatures, thicknesses, and cuts, this method consistently delivers tender pork chops with great flavor and no guesswork.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    What is the safe internal temperature for pork chops?

    Pork chops are safe to eat at 145°F, followed by a 3-minute rest. Use a meat thermometer inserted into the thickest part of the chop for accuracy.

    Should I bake pork chops covered or uncovered?

    Bake pork chops uncovered for better browning. If they are thick and you're worried about drying out, you can loosely tent with foil during the last few minutes.

    Why are my pork chops dry?

    Dry pork chops usually mean they were overcooked. Even a few extra minutes can make a difference. Always cook to temperature, not just time.

    Do bone-in and boneless pork chops cook differently?

    Yes. Bone-in pork chops typically take slightly longer to cook and often stay a bit juicier because the bone helps retain moisture.

    Can I cook pork chops from frozen?

    It's best to thaw them first for even cooking. Cooking from frozen can lead to dry outsides and undercooked centers.

    Pork chops in the oven cooking time chart at 400 degrees showing thickness and bake times.

    Bone-In vs. Boneless Pork Chops

    Both work beautifully in the oven, but here's what to expect:

    Bone-In Pork Chops

    • Slightly longer cook time
    • Often more flavorful
    • Tend to stay juicier

    Boneless Pork Chops

    • Cook faster
    • Easier to slice and serve
    • Great for quick weeknight meals

    Either option works with the timing guide below.

    What Temperature to Bake Pork Chops

    The oven temperature affects both texture and cook time.

    350°F - More gentle cooking, slightly longer time
    375°F - Balanced option for tenderness and browning
    400°F - My preferred temperature for juicy results with good color
    425°F - Faster cooking, better browning, watch carefully

    If you prefer high, direct heat from above for faster browning, you may also like broiled pork chops.

    For most 1-inch thick pork chops, 400°F gives the best combination of tenderness and flavor.

    How Long to Bake Pork Chops

    Cooking time depends on thickness and oven temperature.

    At 400°F:

    • ½-inch thick: 8-12 minutes
    • 1-inch thick: 15-20 minutes
    • 1½-inch thick: 20-25 minutes

    Always confirm with a thermometer. Remove from oven at 145°F and let rest 3-5 minutes before serving.

    Three baked boneless pork chops in a glass baking dish.

    Ingredients

    • Pork chops (bone-in or boneless) - The star of the dish. Choose evenly sized chops for even cooking.
    • Olive oil - Helps the seasoning stick and promotes browning.
    • Salt - Enhances natural flavor and helps retain moisture.
    • Black pepper - Adds simple, classic warmth.
    • Garlic powder - Provides savory depth without overpowering the pork.
    • Paprika - Adds mild smokiness and beautiful color.

    You can customize seasoning based on preference, but this simple blend works beautifully.

    Instructions

    1. Preheat your oven to 400°F.
    2. Pat pork chops dry with paper towels. This helps them brown instead of steam.
    3. Rub both sides lightly with olive oil.
    4. Season generously with salt, pepper, garlic powder, and paprika.
    5. Place pork chops on a baking sheet or in a baking dish, leaving space between each one.
    6. Bake according to thickness guidelines above.
    7. Remove from oven once internal temperature reaches 145°F.
    8. Rest for 3-5 minutes before serving.

    Flavor Variations

    Once you've mastered the basic oven method, try one of these reader-favorite versions:

    • BBQ Baked Boneless Pork Chops - Sweet, saucy, and perfect for weeknights.
    • Grilled Pork Chops - Bold flavor with a caramelized finish.
    • Crock Pot Pork Chops - A hands-off, slow cooker version for extra tenderness.
    • Southern Fried Pork Chops - Crispy and classic comfort food.

    This guide gives you the base method. From there, flavors are endless.

    Tips for Perfect Pork Chops

    • Use a thermometer. Guessing leads to dry pork.
    • Let chops come closer to room temperature before baking.
    • Rest after baking to keep juices inside.
    • Avoid overcrowding the pan.
    • Thicker chops stay juicier than very thin ones.

    Recipe

    A sliced, boneless pork chop that was baked in the oven, sitting on a plate.
    Print Pin
    4.34 from 3 votes

    Oven Baked Pork Chops (Bone-In & Boneless)

    This easy oven baked pork chop method works for both bone-in and boneless chops. Bake at 400°F until the internal temperature reaches 145°F for juicy, tender results every time.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 15 minutes minutes
    Total Time 20 minutes minutes
    Servings 4 servings
    Calories 241kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 4 pork chops bone-in or boneless, about 1 inch thick
    • 1 tablespoon olive oil
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • ½ teaspoon black pepper
    • ½ teaspoon garlic powder
    • ½ teaspoon paprika

    Instructions

    • Preheat your oven to 400°F.
    • Pat pork chops dry with paper towels. This helps them brown instead of steam.
    • Rub both sides lightly with olive oil.
    • Season generously with salt, pepper, garlic powder, and paprika.
    • Place pork chops on a baking sheet or in a baking dish, leaving space between each one.
    • Bake according to thickness guidelines above.
    • Remove from oven once internal temperature reaches 145°F.
    • Rest for 3-5 minutes before serving.

    Notes

    This seasoning amount works well for 4 standard pork chops. Adjust slightly if using very large or thick cuts.
    • Cooking time depends on thickness.
    At 400°F:
    • ½-inch thick: 8-12 minutes
    • 1-inch thick: 15-20 minutes
    • 1½-inch thick: 20-25 minutes
    • Bone-in chops may take slightly longer.
    • Always cook to 145°F internal temperature and rest 3-5 minutes.
    • See full post above for temperature chart and thickness guide.
     

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1pork chop | Calories: 241kcal | Carbohydrates: 1g | Protein: 29g | Fat: 13g | Saturated Fat: 4g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 90mg | Sodium: 646mg | Potassium: 513mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 0.04g | Vitamin A: 130IU | Vitamin C: 0.01mg | Calcium: 12mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Cheesecake Poke Cake

    March 17, 2026

    A slice of strawberry cheesecake poke cake on a round plate.

    Strawberry Cheesecake Poke Cake is a soft strawberry sheet cake filled with creamy cheesecake pudding, topped with fluffy whipped topping and fresh strawberries. It's a simple, crowd-pleasing dessert recipe that's perfect for potlucks, spring gatherings, and holidays.

    A Creamy Strawberry Dessert That Always Gets Attention

    If you love strawberry desserts that feel a little special but are still easy to make, this strawberry cheesecake poke cake delivers every time. The strawberry cake bakes up soft and fluffy, then gets filled with a thick, creamy cheesecake pudding mixture that settles into every bite, not too dissimilar to the way the cream cheese filling settles into the strawberry cake batter in this strawberry earthquake cake.

    A slice of strawberry cheesecake poke cake on a round plate.

    The whipped topping keeps the dessert light, while the fresh strawberries on top add just enough brightness to balance the creamy filling. It's the kind of chilled dessert that people go back for seconds of, especially at potlucks and summer gatherings.

    And after testing it a few different ways, adding softened cream cheese to the pudding mixture made a noticeable difference. It deepens the cheesecake flavor and gives the filling a thicker texture so the cake slices beautifully when served.

    FAQs

    Why add cream cheese to the pudding filling?

    Adding softened cream cheese gives the filling a richer cheesecake flavor and helps thicken the pudding mixture. During testing, the filling held its shape better and sliced more cleanly when cream cheese was included.
    Be sure to mix the pudding with milk first and allow it to thicken before adding the cream cheese. This keeps the filling smooth and prevents it from becoming too loose.

    How long should poke cake chill before serving?

    This cake needs at least 2 hours in the refrigerator so the cheesecake filling can fully set inside the cake. Chilling also allows the flavors to blend together and gives the best texture when slicing.

    How should strawberry cheesecake poke cake be stored?

    Store the cake covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Because the filling and topping contain dairy, the cake should remain chilled.

    Can you freeze poke cake?

    Yes. You can freeze the cake without the fresh strawberries on top for up to 1 month. Wrap tightly with plastic wrap and foil.
    Thaw overnight in the refrigerator and add fresh strawberries just before serving.

    Ingredients

    • Strawberry cake mix - A boxed strawberry cake mix creates a soft, fluffy base with bright strawberry flavor and a beautiful pink color.
    • Eggs - Help bind the cake together while adding richness and structure.
    • Vegetable oil - Keeps the cake moist and tender. Any neutral oil works well.
    • Water - Combines with the cake mix to create a smooth batter and light texture.
    • Instant cheesecake pudding mix - Adds sweet cheesecake flavor and creates a thick filling that sets nicely inside the cake.
    • Milk - Activates the pudding mixture and helps it thicken into a creamy filling.
    • Cream cheese - Adds richness and a true cheesecake flavor while thickening the pudding filling.
    • Whipped topping - Creates a light, fluffy layer that balances the rich cheesecake filling.
    • Fresh strawberries - Provide freshness, natural sweetness, and a beautiful finishing touch.
    Ingredients to make a strawberry cheesecake poke cake on a kitchen counter.

    Instructions

    Bake the cake

    Preheat the oven to 350°F. Line a 9×13 baking dish with parchment paper and lightly spray with baking spray.

    In a large mixing bowl, combine the strawberry cake mix with the eggs, vegetable oil, and water according to the package directions. Stir until smooth.

    Strawberry cake mix, eggs and oil in a mixing bowl.

    Pour the batter into the prepared baking dish and bake for 32 to 35 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted into the center comes out clean.

    Strawberry cake batter in 9x13 baking pan.

    Allow the cake to cool for about 10 to 15 minutes until warm but not hot.

    Using the handle of a wooden spoon or a large straw, poke holes evenly across the cake. Push the holes most of the way down into the cake but not through the bottom.

    Make the cheesecake filling

    In a mixing bowl, beat the softened cream cheese until smooth.

    In a separate bowl, whisk together the cheesecake pudding mix and cold milk until thick and creamy.

    Once the pudding has thickened, add the softened cream cheese and mix until fully combined and smooth.

    Pudding and cream cheese together in mixing bowl.

    Fill the cake

    Transfer the cheesecake filling to a piping bag or zip-top bag. Cut a small opening and pipe the filling into each hole in the cake.

    Holes in cake filled with pudding and cream cheese mixture.

    Spread the remaining pudding mixture evenly across the top of the cake.

    Pudding mixture spread on top of the cake.

    Chill

    Refrigerate the cake for at least 2 hours so the filling can fully set.

    Add the topping

    Allow the whipped topping to thaw for about 30 minutes until spreadable.

    Spread an even layer of whipped topping over the chilled cake. Sprinkle the chopped strawberries evenly across the top.

    Diced strawberries sprinkled on top of Cool Whip topping on cake.

    Slice and serve chilled.

    Tips

    • Mix the pudding with milk first before adding the cream cheese for the smoothest filling.
    • Poking holes while the cake is still warm helps the filling settle into the cake more easily.
    • A piping bag makes filling the holes quicker and cleaner than pouring the mixture.
    • Add fresh strawberries within a few hours of serving so they stay fresh and bright.

    More Strawberry Recipes You’ll Love

    • Strawberry Jello Cake is a soft, moist sheet cake made with white cake mix, strawberry gelatin, and fresh strawberries, topped with a fluffy strawberry cream cheese frosting.
    • Strawberry Brownies are made with a strawberry cake mix and just a few simple ingredients for the perfect dessert.
    • Strawberry Whipped Cream Cake has a milky filling and is topped with creamy homemade whipped cream and fresh sliced strawberries.

    Recipe

    A slice of strawberry cheesecake poke cake on a round plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Strawberry Cheesecake Poke Cake

    This strawberry cheesecake poke cake combines soft strawberry cake, creamy cheesecake pudding filling, and fresh strawberries for a chilled dessert that's perfect for potlucks and spring gatherings.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 20 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 32 minutes minutes
    Chill Time 2 hours hours
    Total Time 2 hours hours 52 minutes minutes
    Servings 12 servings
    Calories 404kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 15.25 ounces Strawberry cake mix
    • 3 eggs
    • ½ cup vegetable oil
    • 1 cup water
    • 3.4 ounces cheesecake instant pudding
    • 2 cups cold 2% milk
    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
    • 8 ounces whipped topping softened enough to spread
    • 1 cup chopped strawberries between 8-10, depending on the size of strawberries

    Instructions

    Bake the cake

    • Preheat the oven to 350 degrees. Line a 9×13 baking dish with a piece of parchment paper and lightly spray with baking spray. Set aside.
    • In a large mixing bowl add the strawberry cake mix and follow the instructions on the box by adding the eggs, oil, and water. Stir to combine.
    • Transfer the cake batter to the prepared baking dish. Bake the cake for 32-35 minutes or until a toothpick comes out clean in the center. Allow the cake to cool for 10-15 minutes, until warm but not hot.
    • Using the handle of a wooden spoon or a large straw, poke holes evenly across the cake, going most of the way down but not through the bottom.

    Make the cheesecake filling

    • In a mixing bowl, beat the softened cream cheese until smooth. Set aside.
    • In a separate mixing bowl, add the instant cheesecake pudding mix and cold milk. Mix until thick and creamy. Once thickened, add the softened cream cheese and mix to combine.

    Fill the cake

    • Add the cheesecake filling to a piping bag or a zip bag, cut the tip or a corner of the bag and pipe the cheesecake filling into each hole. Evenly distribute the leftover pudding on top of the cake.

    Chill

    • Put the cake in the fridge for at least two hours to allow the filling to fully set.
    • Allow the whipped topping to thaw for about 30 minutes.
    • Spread an even layer of whipped topping over the chilled cake.
    • Top with chopped fresh strawberries. Slice and serve chilled.

    Notes

    Store covered in the refrigerator for up to 3 days. Because of the dairy-based filling and topping, this cake must remain chilled.
    This cake is best made 1 day in advance.
    You can bake and fill the cake the night before, then add whipped topping and strawberries the next day for the freshest look.
    Add fresh strawberries within 6-8 hours of serving for the best texture.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 404kcal | Carbohydrates: 44g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 23g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 64mg | Sodium: 672mg | Potassium: 133mg | Fiber: 0.2g | Sugar: 25g | Vitamin A: 369IU | Vitamin C: 7mg | Calcium: 155mg | Iron: 1mg

    Meatball Casserole

    March 16, 2026

    A wooden spoon dishing out a serving of meatball casserole in a 9x13 baking dish.

    Meatball Casserole is a simple baked pasta dinner made with rotini, marinara sauce, tender meatballs, and melted mozzarella cheese. It's an easy, family-friendly casserole recipe that comes together in one dish and bakes into a hearty, comforting meal.

    An Easy Weeknight Casserole the Whole Family Loves

    Some nights just call for a dinner that's simple, filling, and guaranteed to make everyone happy at the table. This meatball casserole is exactly that kind of recipe. Everything goes straight into the baking dish… the pasta, sauce, broth, milk, and meatballs… and the oven does the rest of the work.

    As it bakes, the pasta absorbs the rich marinara and broth, creating a saucy, flavorful casserole. The meatballs warm through and soak up the sauce, and the final layer of melted mozzarella brings everything together into a cozy, satisfying dinner that tastes like classic baked pasta but takes almost no effort.

    Meatball casserole in a baking dish, with wooden spoon pulling casserole out.

    It's perfect for busy weeknights, feeding a crowd, or anytime you want a warm, comforting dinner without standing over the stove. If you love meatball dishes, then you’ll also want to see these fun Meatball Stuffed Peppers recipe.

    FAQs

    Can I use frozen meatballs?

    Yes. If using frozen meatballs, allow them to thaw first so they heat evenly while the pasta cooks.

    Can I substitute the beef broth?

    You can easily swap the beef broth for chicken broth or even water. The broth simply adds extra flavor to the sauce while the pasta cooks.

    Can I make this casserole ahead of time?

    You can assemble the casserole a few hours in advance and store it covered in the refrigerator until ready to bake. Add a few extra minutes to the bake time if starting cold.

    How do I store leftovers?

    Store leftovers in an airtight container in the refrigerator for up to 5 days.

    Can this casserole be frozen?

    Yes. Let the casserole cool completely, then store it in a freezer-safe container for up to 3 months. Thaw overnight in the refrigerator and reheat in the oven until warmed through.

    Ingredients

    • Rotini pasta - The spiral shape holds onto the sauce well and cooks perfectly right in the casserole.
    • Marinara sauce - Adds rich tomato flavor and forms the base of the sauce for the pasta.
    • Beef broth - Helps cook the pasta in the oven while adding depth and savory flavor.
    • Milk - Balances the acidity of the tomato sauce and creates a slightly creamy texture.
    • Fully cooked meatballs - Makes this recipe incredibly quick and easy while still hearty and satisfying.
    • Sea salt - Enhances the overall flavor of the casserole.
    • Ground black pepper - Adds a mild warmth that complements the marinara sauce.
    • Mozzarella cheese - Melts into a gooey, cheesy topping that brings everything together.

    Optional garnish

    • Fresh basil - Adds a fresh, bright finish.
    • Italian seasoning - Gives the casserole a classic Italian flavor.
    Ingredients for meatball casserole on wooden table.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven to 425°F and spray a 9×13-inch baking dish with non-stick cooking spray.

    Add the rotini pasta, marinara sauce, beef broth, milk, salt, and pepper to the prepared baking dish. Stir everything together until evenly combined.

    Noodles, broth, and sauce in baking dish.

    Place the meatballs evenly over the top of the pasta mixture.

    Meatballs placed on top of noodles.

    Cover the casserole tightly with aluminum foil and bake for about 35 minutes.

    Carefully remove the casserole from the oven and check the pasta. It should be al dente and nearly tender.

    Baked meatballs and cooked pasta in 9x13 baking dish.

    Sprinkle the freshly shredded mozzarella evenly over the top.

    Return the casserole to the oven uncovered and bake until the cheese is melted and the pasta is fully tender, about 5-10 minutes more.

    Cheese melted on top of meatball casserole in 9x13 baking dish.

    Garnish with fresh basil and a sprinkle of Italian seasoning if desired. Serve warm.

    Tips

    • Freshly shredded mozzarella melts smoother than pre-shredded cheese.
    • If you like a little heat, add a pinch of red pepper flakes to the pasta mixture before baking.
    • Make sure the casserole is covered tightly with foil so the pasta cooks properly.
    • Stir the pasta mixture well before baking so the noodles cook evenly in the liquid.
    A serving of meatball casserole on a round plate, with a fork.

    More Comforting Recipes

    • Old Fashioned Sloppy Joes are full of flavor and best served on a bun with your favorite side.
    • Chicken Spaghetti with Rotel features shredded chicken, Rotel tomatoes, all topped with cheddar cheese.
    • Doritos Chicken Casserole features simple ingredients for a comforting, hearty meal.
    • This creamy Chicken Alfredo Lasagna turns a classic recipe into a creamy, rich dish that pasta lovers will adore.

    Recipe

    A wooden spoon dishing out a serving of meatball casserole in a 9x13 baking dish.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Meatball Casserole

    This easy meatball casserole combines pasta, marinara sauce, tender meatballs, and melted mozzarella cheese into a simple baked dinner that's hearty, comforting, and perfect for busy nights.
    Course Main Course
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 5 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 50 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 322kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 14.5 ounces package uncooked rotini pasta
    • 24 ounce jar marinara sauce
    • 2 cups beef broth
    • 1 cup milk
    • 16 ounce package fully-cooked meatballs thawed
    • ½ teaspoon sea salt
    • ¼ teaspoon ground black pepper
    • 2 cups shredded mozzarella cheese freshly shredded

    Optional garnish:

    • fresh basil chopped
    • ¼ teaspoon Italian seasoning

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 425 degrees fahrenheit. Spray a 9×13-inch baking dish with non-stick cooking spray.
    • In the prepared dish, add in the pasta, marinara, beef broth, milk, salt and pepper. Stir to combine. Next, add meatballs to the top of the mixture.
    • Cover the casserole tightly with aluminum foil and bake for 35 minutes.
    • Carefully remove the casserole and check the pasta for doneness. The pasta should be el dente. Sprinkle freshly shredded mozzarella cheese evenly over the top.
    • Bake uncovered until the cheese is melted and the pasta is tender, about 5-10 more minutes.
    • Garnish with fresh basil and a dash of italian seasoning. Serve warm and enjoy.

    Notes

    Add a pinch of red pepper flakes for additional heat.
    You can replace beef broth with chicken broth or water.
    Store in the refrigerator in an airtight container for up to 5 days.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 322kcal | Carbohydrates: 45g | Protein: 16g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 5g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 2g | Cholesterol: 27mg | Sodium: 963mg | Potassium: 473mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 608IU | Vitamin C: 6mg | Calcium: 207mg | Iron: 2mg

    Burnt Sugar Cake

    March 15, 2026

    A slice of burnt sugar cake on a round, vintage plate.

    Burnt Sugar Sheet Cake is a classic old-fashioned dessert made with deep caramelized burnt sugar syrup baked into a soft, fluffy 9×13 cake and finished with a rich brown sugar icing. If you love vintage church-cookbook cakes, this one has that unmistakable nostalgic flavor that people remember from Grandma's table.

    A Deeply Caramelized Cake That Feels Like a True Vintage Classic

    Burnt sugar cake is one of those recipes that feels like it belongs in a well-worn church cookbook, and on a potluck dessert table. The flavor comes from real burnt sugar syrup, where granulated sugar is cooked until dark amber and slightly smoky before being turned into a syrup.

    That syrup gives the cake its signature color and deep caramel flavor. It's richer and more complex than a typical caramel cake, and when paired with the boiled brown sugar icing on top, it creates a dessert that tastes unmistakably old-fashioned in the best way.

    A slice of burnt sugar cake on a round, vintage plate, sitting next to a cup of coffee.

    This version is baked as a simple 9×13 sheet cake, so you get all the traditional flavor without fussing with cake layers. It's soft, fluffy, and even better the next day, making it perfect for potlucks, holidays, or make-ahead desserts.

    FAQs

    What does burnt sugar cake taste like?

    Burnt sugar cake has a deep caramel flavor that's slightly smoky and less sweet than typical caramel cake. The burnt sugar syrup creates a richer, more complex flavor than standard caramel.

    Is burnt sugar cake the same as caramel cake?

    They're similar, but not the same. Caramel cake typically uses caramel made with butter and sugar, while burnt sugar cake uses sugar cooked until very dark before turning it into a syrup, giving the cake a deeper flavor.

    Can I make burnt sugar cake ahead of time?

    Yes. This cake actually tastes even better the next day. As it sits, the caramelized sugar flavor becomes deeper and more pronounced.

    Why does the sugar seize when making burnt sugar syrup?

    This can happen when the hot water hits the caramelized sugar. Simply return the mixture to low heat and stir until the hardened sugar dissolves again.

    How do I know when the sugar is burnt enough?

    The sugar should be very dark amber with a slightly smoky aroma. If it turns black, it has burned too far and will taste bitter.

    Ingredients

    Burnt Sugar Syrup

    • Granulated sugar - Melted until very dark amber to create the signature burnt sugar flavor.
    • Boiling hot water - Carefully added to turn the caramelized sugar into a smooth syrup used in the cake and icing.

    Burnt Sugar Sheet Cake

    • Unsalted butter - Adds richness and helps create a soft crumb.
    • Granulated sugar - Sweetens the cake and helps the butter cream into a light base.
    • Eggs - Provide structure and help the cake bake up fluffy.
    • Burnt sugar syrup - The key ingredient that gives the cake its deep caramel flavor and color.
    • All-purpose flour - Provides the structure for the sheet cake.
    • Baking powder - Helps the cake rise and stay light.
    • Baking soda - Works with the buttermilk for extra lift.
    • Salt - Balances the sweetness and enhances the caramel flavor.
    • Buttermilk - Adds moisture and a slight tang that balances the rich sugar syrup.
    • Vanilla extract - Rounds out the caramel notes with warm flavor.
    Ingredients to make burnt sugar cake, sitting on kitchen counter.

    Burnt Sugar Icing

    • Unsalted butter - Forms the base of the rich boiled icing.
    • Brown sugar - Adds a warm molasses flavor that pairs beautifully with the burnt sugar syrup.
    • Burnt sugar syrup - Boosts the caramel flavor in the icing.
    • Milk - Helps create a smooth, pourable icing texture.
    • Powdered sugar - Thickens the icing so it spreads easily and sets as it cools.
    • Vanilla extract - Adds warmth and depth to the icing.
    Burnt sugar cake frosting ingredients sitting on kitchen counter.

    Instructions

    How to Make Burnt Sugar Syrup

    Place sugar in a heavy saucepan over medium heat. Allow the sugar to melt without stirring. As it melts, the color will deepen.

    Continue cooking until the sugar becomes a very dark amber color with a lightly smoky aroma. Watch closely, as sugar can burn quickly at this stage.

    Sugar burnt in saucepan.

    Remove the pan from heat and very slowly pour the boiling hot water into the sugar, stirring with a wooden spoon. Wear oven mitts while doing this, as the mixture will bubble and steam vigorously.

    Sugar and water bubbling in saucepan.

    If the sugar seizes and hardens, return the pan to medium-low heat and stir until the mixture becomes smooth again.

    Remove from heat and allow the syrup to cool completely to room temperature before using in the cake.

    Burnt sugar in saucepan.

    Make the Burnt Sugar Sheet Cake

    Preheat the oven to 350°F. Grease and line a 9×13-inch metal baking pan with parchment paper.

    In a large mixing bowl, cream the butter and sugar together until very light and fluffy, about 3 to 4 minutes.

    Butter and sugar in mixing bowl.

    Add the eggs one at a time, mixing well after each addition.

    Eggs added to butter and sugar in mixing bowl.

    Mix in the burnt sugar syrup and vanilla extract until fully incorporated. The batter may look loose, which is normal.

    Burnt sugar and vanilla added to sugar and butter mixture.

    In a separate bowl, whisk together the flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt.

    Dry ingredients in mixing bowl.

    Add the dry ingredients to the batter in three additions, alternating with the buttermilk, beginning and ending with the dry ingredients.

    Dry ingredients added to butter and sugar.

    Spread the batter evenly into the prepared pan.

    Burnt sugar cake batter poured in to 9x13 baking dish.

    Bake for 35 to 40 minutes, or until the center springs back lightly and a toothpick inserted comes out clean.

    Baked burnt sugar cake in 9x13 baking pan.

    Allow the cake to cool slightly before adding the icing.

    Make the Burnt Sugar Icing

    Melt the butter in a saucepan over medium heat.

    Melted butter in sauce pan.

    Stir in the brown sugar, burnt sugar syrup, and milk. Bring the mixture to a gentle boil while stirring constantly.

    Brown sugar added to melted butter.

    Boil for 2 minutes, then remove from heat.

    Allow the mixture to cool for about 5 minutes, then whisk in the powdered sugar until thick but spreadable.

    Burnt sugar frosting in sauce pan with powdered sugar added.

    Stir in the vanilla extract.

    Spread the icing over the warm cake, allowing it to smooth out and set as it cools.

    Burnt sugar cake, frosted, sitting on wooden cutting board.

    Let the cake sit for at least 30 minutes before serving.

    Tips

    • Use a heavy saucepan when making burnt sugar syrup to prevent scorching.
    • Watch the sugar closely once it begins melting because it can go from amber to burnt quickly.
    • Pour the boiling water very slowly into the caramelized sugar to avoid splattering.
    • This cake actually tastes better the next day, making it perfect for preparing ahead of time.
    • The icing will thicken as it cools, so spread it on the cake while it is still warm and pourable.

    A True Old-Fashioned Caramel Cake Experience

    A slice of burnt sugar cake, sitting on a vintage plate, with a bite taken off.

    Burnt Sugar Sheet Cake is a nostalgic dessert with deep caramel flavor, soft fluffy texture, and a rich brown sugar icing that sets beautifully on top. It's the kind of cake that feels right at home at potlucks, Sunday dinners, and holiday tables.

    More Vintage Recipes

    If you love vintage recipes like this one, then you’ll also love these:

    • Westhaven Cake is a rich, old-fashioned chocolate cake made with softened dates and topped with warm fudge icing.
    • Cowboy Pasta Salad – is a hearty, flavor-packed pasta salad made with smoky BBQ dressing, sausage, bacon, beans, and cheese.
    • Shoofly Cake – is a rich, old-fashioned molasses cake with a tender base and crumbly topping, baked in a simple 9×13 pan.
    • Old Fashioned Salmon Patties Recipe – made with Old Bay seasoning to kick up the flavor, are shallow-fried to crispy perfection.

    Recipe

    A slice of burnt sugar cake on a round, vintage plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Burnt Sugar Cake

    This Burnt Sugar Sheet Cake is a soft, fluffy old-fashioned cake made with homemade burnt sugar syrup and topped with a rich brown sugar icing that sets beautifully as it cools. The deep caramel flavor makes it a nostalgic dessert that's perfect for potlucks, holidays, or make-ahead gatherings.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 30 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 1 hour hour 15 minutes minutes
    Servings 15 slices
    Calories 677kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    Burnt Sugar Ingredients:

    • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar
    • 1 ½ cups boiling hot water

    Burnt Sugar Sheet Cake Ingredients

    • ¾ cups unsalted butter, softened 12 tablespoons
    • 1 ½ cups granulated sugar
    • 3 large eggs room temperature
    • 1 cup burnt sugar syrup
    • 3 cups all-purpose flour
    • 2 ½ teaspoons baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon baking soda
    • ¾ teaspoon salt
    • 1 cup buttermilk room temperature
    • 1 ½ teaspoons vanilla extract

    Burnt Sugar Icing Ingredients:

    • ¾ cup unsalted butter 12 tablespoons
    • 1 ½ cups packed brown sugar
    • ¼ cup burnt sugar syrup
    • ⅓ cup milk
    • 3 cups powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract

    Instructions

    How to Make Burnt Sugar Syrup

    • Place sugar in a heavy saucepan over medium heat. Allow the sugar to melt without stirring. As it liquefies, the color will deepen. Continue cooking until the sugar reaches a very dark amber with a lightly smoky aroma. Keep a close eye on the sugar, as it will melt quickly.
    • Remove the saucepan from the heat and immediately, very slowly, pour the boiling hot water into the mixture. Stir with a wooden spoon as you add the boiling hot water. You will want to wear oven mitts while pouring and stirring the boiling hot water. The mixture will bubble and steam vigorously, and the sugar may seize and harden slightly.
    • Add the saucepan back to the stove over medium-low heat if the sugar has seized. Continue stirring until any hardened sugar has completely dissolved and the mixture is smooth.
    • Remove the saucepan from the stove and allow the syrup to cool completely to room temperature before using it in the cake recipe.

    How to Make Burnt Sugar Cake

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Grease and line a 9×13 metal baking pan with parchment paper.
    • In a large mixing bowl of a stand mixer, cream the butter and sugar together until very light and fluffy, around 3-4 minutes. Add the eggs one at a time, mixing well after each. Mix in the burnt sugar syrup and vanilla extract until fully incorporated ( the batter may look loose, this is normal.). Scrape down the sides of the bowl with a rubber spatula as often as needed.
    • In a separate bowl, whisk together flour, baking powder, baking soda, and salt. Add the dry ingredients to the batter in three additions, alternating with the buttermilk, beginning and ending with the dry ingredients.
    • Spread the batter evenly in the prepared pan. Bake for 35-40 minutes, or until the center springs back lightly and a toothpick inserted comes out clean. Let the cake cool slightly before icing.

    How to Make Burnt Sugar Cake Frosting

    • Melt the butter in a saucepan over medium heat. Stir in the brown sugar, burnt sugar syrup, and milk. Bring to a gentle boil, stirring constantly. Boil for 2 minutes, then remove from the heat.
    • Allow the mixture to cool for about 5 minutes, then whisk in the powdered sugar until thick but spreadable. Stir in the vanilla extract. Spread icing over the warm cake, allowing it to smooth and set as it cools.
    • Let the cake set for at least 30 minutes before serving. The longer it sits the better the cake will be, making it great for a make ahead dessert.

    Notes

    • Use a heavy saucepan when making burnt sugar syrup to prevent scorching.
    • Watch the sugar closely once it begins melting because it can go from amber to burnt quickly.
    • Pour the boiling water very slowly into the caramelized sugar to avoid splattering.
    • This cake actually tastes better the next day, making it perfect for preparing ahead of time.
    • The icing will thicken as it cools, so spread it on the cake while it is still warm and pourable.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 677kcal | Carbohydrates: 122g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 20g | Saturated Fat: 12g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 84mg | Sodium: 266mg | Potassium: 106mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 103g | Vitamin A: 650IU | Calcium: 98mg | Iron: 2mg

    Chocolate Peanut Butter Dump Cake

    March 14, 2026

    A slice of chocolate peanut butter dump cake on a round plate.

    Chocolate Peanut Butter Dump Cake is an easy, rich dessert layered with chocolate pudding, creamy peanut butter pockets, chocolate cake mix, and melty chocolate and peanut butter chips. It's a simple 9×13 dessert that feels indulgent but takes only minutes to assemble.

    A Chocolate and Peanut Butter Dessert That's Almost Impossible to Mess Up

    If you love the classic chocolate and peanut butter combination, this dump cake delivers everything you want in a dessert: warm, gooey layers, creamy peanut butter bites, and a buttery chocolate topping that forms as it bakes. It's one of those desserts that looks impressive when served but secretly comes together with almost no effort.

    A slice of chocolate peanut butter dump cake on a plate.

    Because the pudding layer bakes underneath the cake mix, the center stays soft and rich while the top turns slightly crisp and crumbly. It's the kind of dessert that disappears quickly at potlucks, family gatherings, or anytime a chocolate craving hits.

    And just like many of the dump cake recipes that readers love on Fantabulosity, it's simple, reliable, and made with pantry-friendly ingredients.

    FAQs

    Can I use a different cake mix instead of chocolate cake mix?

    Yes. Devil's food cake mix or dark chocolate cake mix both work beautifully and will give the dessert an even deeper chocolate flavor.

    Why does my cake sometimes have powdery spots on top after baking?

    This happens when the melted butter doesn't fully moisten the cake mix. Simply drizzle 1-2 tablespoons of melted butter over the dry spots and return the cake to the oven for about 5 minutes.

    Can I use crunchy peanut butter instead of creamy peanut butter?

    You can, but creamy peanut butter creates smoother peanut butter pockets throughout the cake. Crunchy peanut butter will add texture but won't melt as smoothly.

    Can I make this dump cake ahead of time?

    Yes. You can assemble the layers a few hours ahead and bake when ready. You can also bake it completely and gently reheat before serving.

    How should I store leftovers?

    Cover and refrigerate leftovers for up to 3 days. Reheat individual servings in the microwave until warm.

    Ingredients

    • Instant chocolate pudding mix - This forms the rich, soft base layer that keeps the dessert extra gooey and chocolatey.
    • Cold milk - Whisked with the pudding mix to create the creamy bottom layer.
    • Creamy peanut butter - Creates pockets of peanut butter flavor throughout the cake.
    • Powdered sugar - Slightly sweetens the peanut butter mixture and helps it blend smoothly.
    • Vanilla extract - Adds warmth and depth to the peanut butter filling.
    • Chocolate cake mix - The classic shortcut topping that turns buttery and crumbly as it bakes.
    • Unsalted butter - Drizzled over the cake mix to help it bake into that golden, crisp topping.
    • Semi-sweet chocolate chips - Add extra chocolate richness throughout the top layer.
    • Peanut butter chips - Bring even more peanut butter flavor to balance the chocolate.
    Ingredients on kitchen counter to make chocolate peanut butter dump cake.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven and lightly grease a 9×13-inch baking dish.

    In a large bowl, whisk the instant chocolate pudding mixes with cold milk until smooth and thickened.

    Chocolate pudding mix and milk in glass mixing bowl.

    Pour the pudding evenly into the prepared baking dish.

    Chocolate pudding poured in to 9x13 baking pan for dump cake.

    In a small bowl, stir together the peanut butter, powdered sugar, and vanilla extract until smooth and creamy.

    Peanut butter and powdered sugar in clear mixing bowl.

    Dollop spoonfuls of the peanut butter mixture evenly across the pudding layer. Leave the spoonfuls as they are and do not mix them into the pudding.

    Peanut butter dollops on top of chocolate pudding.

    Sprinkle the dry chocolate cake mix evenly over the top of the filling, covering the entire surface.

    Chocolate cake mix sprinkled on top of peanut butter layer.

    Drizzle the melted butter slowly and evenly over the cake mix.

    Melted butter poured over the top of the chocolate cake mix.

    Sprinkle the semi-sweet chocolate chips and peanut butter chips across the top.

    Chocolate chips and peanut butter chips on top of cake mix in 9x13 baking pan.

    Bake uncovered until the top is set and the edges are bubbling.

    Let the cake cool for about 10-15 minutes before serving so the layers can set slightly.

    Baked peanut butter dump cake in a 9x13 baking pan.

    Tips

    • Do not stir the layers after assembling. Keeping them separate helps create the classic dump cake texture.
    • Drizzle the butter slowly and evenly to moisten as much of the cake mix as possible. I’ll even tilt the pan a little sometimes, to try and cover as much of the cake mix as possible with the melted butter.
    • If small dry patches remain after baking, drizzle with a little melted butter and bake a few minutes longer.
    • Letting the cake rest for several minutes after baking helps the pudding layer thicken slightly for easier serving.
    • Serve with a scoop of ice cream if desired.

    More Dump Cake Recipes

    If you love dump cake recipes, make sure to check out these other popular dump cakes…

    • Cherry pineapple dump cake serving on a plate, and topped with a scoop of vanilla ice cream.
      Cherry Pineapple Dump Cake
    • A serving of banana dump cake in a small ramekin with caramel sauce and sliced bananas.
      Banana Dump Cake
    • One serving of pecan pie dump cake on a plate topped with vanilla ice cream and caramel drizzle.
      Pecan Pie Dump Cake
    • A single serving of Oreo dump cake on a plate, that's topped with a scoop of vanilla ice cream.
      Oreo Dump Cake

    Recipe

    A slice of chocolate peanut butter dump cake on a round plate.
    Print Pin
    Be the first to rate!

    Chocolate Peanut Butter Dump Cake

    Chocolate Peanut Butter Dump Cake is a rich layered dessert made with chocolate pudding, creamy peanut butter pockets, chocolate cake mix, and melty chocolate and peanut butter chips.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 10 servings
    Calories 302kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 boxes 3.9 ounces each instant chocolate pudding mix
    • 2 ½ cups cold milk
    • ½ cup creamy peanut butter
    • ¼ cup powdered sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 1 box 15.25 ounces chocolate cake mix
    • ¾ cup 12 tablespoons unsalted butter, melted
    • ½ cup semi-sweet chocolate chips
    • ½ cup peanut butter chips

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Lightly grease a 9×13-inch baking dish.
    • In a large bowl, whisk the pudding mixes with cold milk until smooth and thickened. Pour evenly into the prepared baking dish.
    • In a small bowl, stir together the peanut butter, powdered sugar, and vanilla extract until smooth.
    • Dollop the peanut butter mixture across the pudding layer, spacing spoonfuls evenly over the top of the pudding. Don't mix into the pudding layer or spread.
    • Sprinkle the dry cake mix evenly over the top, covering the filling completely.
    • Drizzle the melted butter slowly and evenly over the cake mix.
    • Sprinkle semi-sweet chocolate chips and peanut butter chips evenly over the cake mix.
    • Bake uncovered for 45-50 minutes, or until the top is set and the edges are bubbling.
    • Let the cake cool for 10-15 minutes before serving to allow the layers to firm up.

    Notes

    Avoid stirring the layers to maintain proper texture.
    I’ll tilt the pan a little sometimes, to try and cover as much of the cake mix as possible with the melted butter.
    ​If small dry patches remain after baking, drizzle with 1-2 tablespoons melted butter and return to the oven for about 5 minutes.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1slice | Calories: 302kcal | Carbohydrates: 14g | Protein: 6g | Fat: 26g | Saturated Fat: 13g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 8g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 44mg | Sodium: 84mg | Potassium: 227mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 11g | Vitamin A: 529IU | Vitamin C: 0.04mg | Calcium: 91mg | Iron: 1mg

    Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake

    March 13, 2026

    Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake serving on a round plate.

    Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake is an easy, crowd-pleasing dessert made with sweet strawberry pie filling, creamy pockets of cheesecake goodness, and a buttery golden cake topping. It's a simple dump cake that's perfect for potlucks, holidays, or when you need a quick dessert everyone will love.

    If you love easy desserts like this one, be sure to check out my other dump cake recipes, which are some of the most popular desserts on Fantabulosity.

    A Sweet, Creamy Dump Cake That Everyone Asks For

    If you love classic dump cakes but want something that feels just a little more indulgent, this strawberry dump cake with cream cheese delivers every time. The strawberry pie filling becomes warm and jammy as it bakes, while the dollops of sweetened cream cheese create creamy bites throughout the cake, much like in this strawberry earthquake cake. On top, the buttery cake mix bakes into that golden, crumbly layer everyone digs into first.

    Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake on round plate.

    It's the kind of dessert that's almost impossible to mess up. Everything layers right in the baking dish, there's no complicated mixing, and the oven does the rest. That's exactly why dump cakes like this have stayed popular at potlucks and family gatherings for decades.

    FAQs

    Can I use a different cake mix instead of yellow cake mix?

    Yes. White cake mix or vanilla cake mix both work well with this recipe. Yellow cake mix simply adds a slightly richer, buttery flavor.

    Can I use fresh strawberries instead of pie filling?

    Pie filling works best because it already contains the sugar and thickened syrup needed for the proper texture. Fresh strawberries release more liquid and would require additional sugar and thickener.

    Why is my dump cake powdery on top?

    This usually means some of the cake mix didn't get enough butter. Simply drizzle an extra tablespoon or two of melted butter over the dry spots and bake for about five more minutes.

    Can this dump cake be made ahead of time?

    Yes. You can assemble the layers a few hours ahead of time and bake when ready. You can also bake it completely and gently reheat before serving.

    How should leftovers be stored?

    Cover the pan or transfer leftovers to an airtight container and refrigerate for up to 3 days. Reheat individual portions in the microwave.

    Ingredients

    • Strawberry pie filling – This creates the sweet, jammy base of the cake and gives the dessert its bold strawberry flavor.
    • Cream cheese – Adds creamy pockets throughout the dessert that taste almost like cheesecake baked into the cake.
    • Granulated sugar – Sweetens the cream cheese mixture and helps it blend smoothly.
    • Vanilla extract – Adds warmth and flavor to the cream cheese mixture.
    • Yellow cake mix – The dry cake mix forms the classic buttery topping that makes dump cakes so easy.
    • Unsalted butter – Melted butter moistens the cake mix and helps it bake into a golden, slightly crisp topping.
    Ingredients to make Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake recipe.

    Instructions

    Preheat the oven and prepare the baking dish. Lightly grease a 9×13 baking dish and set it aside.

    Spread the strawberry pie filling evenly across the bottom of the dish to create the base layer.

    Strawberry pie filling spread on the bottom of a 9x13 baking dish.

    In a bowl, beat the softened cream cheese with the sugar and vanilla until smooth and creamy.

    Cream cheese, sugar and vanilla mixed in glass mixing bowl.

    Dollop the cream cheese mixture evenly over the strawberry filling. Small spoonfuls work best and should not be spread out.

    Cream cheese mixture dropped in spoonfuls on top of strawberry pie filling in 9x13 baking dish.

    Sprinkle the dry cake mix evenly across the entire dish, covering the filling completely.

    Cake mix sprinkled on top of cream cheese mixture.

    Slowly drizzle the melted butter over the cake mix so most of the dry mix becomes moistened.

    Melted butter drizzled on top of cake mix in 9x13 baking dish.

    Bake uncovered until the top becomes golden and the edges are bubbling.

    Baked strawberry cream cheese dump cake.

    Allow the cake to cool slightly before serving so the filling can set.

    Tips

    • Don't stir the layers. Dump cakes bake best when the ingredients are simply layered in the dish.
    • Dollop the cream cheese rather than spreading it so you get creamy bites throughout the cake.
    • Drizzle butter slowly and evenly, paying attention to the corners where dry spots often occur.
    • If a few dry cake mix spots remain after baking, drizzle a little extra melted butter on top and bake a few minutes longer.
    • Let the cake rest for about 15-20 minutes before serving so the filling thickens slightly.

    Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake serving on round plate.

    Serving Suggestions

    Serve warm with a scoop of vanilla ice cream or a dollop of whipped cream.

    Garnish with fresh strawberries for an extra burst of color and flavor.

    For a fun finishing touch, drizzle slices with white chocolate or strawberry sauce.

    More Vintage Recipes

    If you love vintage recipes like this strawberry dump cake, you’ll also love these other old-fashioned recipes:

    • Cherry Dump Cake – A traditional dump cake recipe, this 3-ingredient cake uses cherry pie filling.
    • Westhaven Cake – a rich, old-fashioned chocolate cake that’s made with softened dates and topped with a warm fudge icing.
    • Cowboy Pasta Salad is an easy, crowd-pleasing vintage recipe that works as a side dish or a full meal.
    • Old Fashioned Salmon Patties are a tried and true classic that are shallow-fried and made with Old Bay Seasoning to kick up the flavor a bit.

    Recipe

    Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake serving on a round plate.
    Print Pin
    5 from 1 vote

    Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake

    This Strawberry Cream Cheese Dump Cake is an easy layered dessert made with strawberry pie filling, sweetened cream cheese dollops, and a buttery cake mix topping baked until golden and bubbly.
    Course Dessert
    Cuisine American
    Prep Time 10 minutes minutes
    Cook Time 45 minutes minutes
    Total Time 55 minutes minutes
    Servings 8 servings
    Calories 477kcal
    Author Jessica Burgess

    Ingredients

    • 2 – 21-ounce cans strawberry pie filling
    • 8 ounces cream cheese softened
    • ¼ cup granulated sugar
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 15.25 ounce box of yellow cake mix
    • ¾ cup unsalted butter which is 12 tablespoons, melted

    Instructions

    • Preheat the oven to 350°F. Lightly grease a 9×13-inch baking dish and set aside.
    • Spread the strawberry pie filling evenly across the bottom of your 9×13 baking dish.
    • In a small bowl, beat the softened cream cheese with sugar and vanilla extract until smooth and creamy.
    • Dollop the cream cheese evenly over the strawberry filling. Small spoonfuls work the best, but do not spread.
    • Sprinkle the dry cake mix evenly over the entire dish, covering the filling completely.
    • Drizzle the melted butter evenly over the cake mix, making sure most of the dry cake mix is moistened.
    • Bake uncovered for 45-50 minutes, or until the top is golden and the edges are bubbling.
    • Let the cake cool slightly before serving. The cake will set up as it cools.

    Notes

    • Don't stir when adding layers. Dump cakes work the best when layered.
    • Optional: Take a fork and gently spread the cake mix in to an even layer to help prevent dry spots.
    • If dry cake mix spots still remain after baking, drizzle with 1-2 tablespoons of melted butter and return to the oven for 5 minutes.
    • Dollop the cream cheese, don't spread it. This will create creamy bites throughout instead of a solid layer.
    • Drizzle butter slowly and evenly. Make sure to pay attention to the corners and edges where dry spots tend to form.
    • After taking the cake out of the oven, let it rest before serving. Cooling for 15-20 minutes will help the filling set and make scooping out of the pan for serving easier.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1serving | Calories: 477kcal | Carbohydrates: 52g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 7g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 74mg | Sodium: 485mg | Potassium: 69mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 31g | Vitamin A: 913IU | Vitamin C: 0.1mg | Calcium: 147mg | Iron: 1mg
    • Page 1
    • Page 2
    • Page 3
    • Interim pages omitted …
    • Page 25
    • Go to Next Page »

    Primary Sidebar

    Jessica Burgess of Fantabulosity, slicing an avocado.

    Hi, I'm Jessica! - Owner and Creator of the blog and brand, Fantabulosity.

    I’m here to help you make easy comfort food and nostalgic recipes, using simple ingredients, that everyone will love.

    More about me →

    Potluck Recipes

    • A slice of strawberry jello cake, topped with a strawberry slice, sitting on a round plate.
      Strawberry Jello Cake (Easy, Moist Strawberry Cake)
    • Crack green beans on wooden spoon.
      Crack Green Beans
    • Old fashioned potluck cake recipes collage.
      Old-Fashioned Cakes That Still Show Up at Every Potluck
    • Collage of potluck desserts.
      Easy Potluck Desserts (Simple Recipes That Always Get Asked For)
    • Cold Pasta Salad Recipes Collage.
      Cold Pasta Salad Recipes
    • Chicken Casserole recipes image collage.
      20 Chicken Casserole Recipes

    Popular Recipes

    • bread pudding in baking dish
      Bread Pudding Recipe: Easy Old Fashioned Recipe (With Video!)
    • Burger baked in the oven, steamed in aluminum foil, and placed on white plate.
      Burgers in the Oven
    • two tuna salad sandwiches stacked on top of each other
      The BEST Tuna Salad Recipe
    • Sliced banana bread on white platter
      Best Banana Bread
    • Strawberry brownies on white marble cutting board.
      Strawberry Brownies Recipe
    • Cheeseburger Sliders
      Cheeseburger Sliders with Hawaiian Rolls

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    Featured In

    About

    • About Jessica
    • Contact
    • Collaborate
    • Dinner System

    Easy Recipes

    • All Recipes
    • Vintage Recipes
    • Dinner Recipes
    • Desserts

    How to Cook

    • Oven-Baked
    • Stove-Top
    • No Bake
    • Cooking Basics

    Privacy Policy |Accessibility Copyright © 2026 Fantabulosity | Terms & Conditions | FTC
    All recipes, photos, and content are copyrighted and may not be reproduced, republished, or distributed without written permission.

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required